JP7166573B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally called "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally called "pachislot machines").

2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes operation means that can be operated by a player, and that effects progress in conjunction with an operation input to the operation means by the player. In such a gaming machine, for example, an image or the like prompting the operation of the operation means is displayed in a variable effect or the like suggesting the degree of expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, and the reception of the operation input of the operation means is displayed. It has been proposed to proceed with the production as a trigger. In addition, such a gaming machine is provided with detection means such as a sensor for detecting the operation of the operation means by the player.

JP 2014-180365 A

For example, the technology described in Patent Literature 1 may reduce the interest in the game .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, one aspect of the present invention aims to prevent a player from losing interest in a game .

In order to solve the above problems, one embodiment of the present invention employs the following configuration. A receiving slot capable of accepting game balls, and a lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the acceptance of the game balls into the receiving slot, and based on the fact that the result of the lottery is a specific result, the player receives a game ball. A gaming machine in which an advantageous winning game is executed,
a first display means capable of displaying an effect corresponding to the result of the lottery in a display area;
a second display means arranged at a predetermined distance in front of the first display means;
a movable body movable from a standby position to an operating position so as to cover the display area of the first display means;
with
The second display means has a transparent light guide plate and a plurality of light emitting portions arranged on one end face side of a plurality of end faces of the light guide plate, and the light from the light emitting portions is projected onto the light guide plate. A predetermined pattern appears on the front side of the light guide plate by being incident from one end face side,
The pattern appearing on the front side of the light guide plate has a plurality of aspects including a first pattern and a second pattern different in aspect from the first pattern, and the pattern appearing in the plurality of aspects is the above-described It is made possible to appear by a plurality of light emitting parts arranged on one end face side,
A first display area of the light guide plate in which the first pattern appears and a second display area of the light guide plate in which the second pattern appears are light emitted from the light emitting unit arranged on the one end face side. are superimposed in the direction of incidence of
The incident area where the light-emitting part that emits light when causing the first pattern to appear on the second display means receives light from the end surface of the second display means is an incident area where the first pattern appears on the second display means. a region smaller than an end face side pattern region projected on the end face of the second display means provided with the light emitting portion capable of appearing the first pattern, and
By causing the plurality of light-emitting units to emit light in a specific order, the second display means can perform an effect with movement in the pattern,
The movable body, which is movable so as to cover the display area of the first display means, is movable behind the light guide plate, and the pattern appearing on the front side of the light guide plate is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is not covered.

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is at the raised position; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front; (a) is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame, viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit, viewed from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a plate base unit in the plate unit; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the top view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit in a dish unit from the forward-backward direction of the production|presentation operation part button unit. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. (a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front right. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front left. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit of the production|presentation operation unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit, and was seen from the front lower side. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion; (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation portion of the pressing operation portion. is a front view of the plate unit when is pressed. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame left side unit. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in . It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing base unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a payout unit in a body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Fig. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction; (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit; It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in a main body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate on the game board. It is a front view of the center accessory and the display effect unit in the front unit of the game board. It is a side cross-sectional view of the display effect unit cut at the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right along with the center accessory. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between LED in a display effect unit, and the reflective recessed part of a front light-guide plate. It is a front view which shows the light emission aspect of a surface light-guide plate. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front light guide plate of the display effect unit is illuminated; It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the lower front central decorative body in the lower movable effect unit is illuminated. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the lower center elevating base is lifted in the lower movable production unit and the lower front center decoration and the lower rear center decoration are illuminated. Lower center elevating base, lower left side elevating base, and lower right side elevating base are lifted in the lower movable production unit to light up the lower front center decoration, lower rear center decoration, lower left side decoration, and lower right side decoration. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where it has been opened. FIG. 109 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the game board is in the state of FIG. 108 and the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is at the raised position; The four rotary decorations, the left-side rotary decoration, the left-side rotary decoration, the right-side rotary decoration, and the right-side rotary decoration in the lower movable production unit are each unfolded to schematically show the decoration of each surface. It is an explanatory diagram. It is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the kind (size) of the arrow light-emitting-displayed in a lower movable production|presentation unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit are lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the drive mechanism of an upper back movable production|presentation unit from a front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the clutch mechanism of an upper back movable production|presentation unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit is lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the upper front movable decoration of an upper front movable production|presentation unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of main control side power-on processing; 9 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of main control side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of a special symbol/special electric accessary product control process. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a special symbol variation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of special design variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a variation pattern selection determination process. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of processing at power-on of a peripheral control unit; 7 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of peripheral controller timer interrupt processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of transition of bit strings in a work area that holds detection histories of pressure detection sensors; 4 is a timing chart showing a first example of pressing operation determination processing; 9 is a timing chart showing a second example of pressing operation determination processing; FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a third example of pressing operation determination processing; FIG. It is the top view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit to which several press detection sensors and several press detection pieces were attached from the forward-backward direction of the production|presentation operation part button unit. FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing a first example of pressing operation determination processing using a plurality of pressing detection sensors; FIG. FIG. 9 is a timing chart showing a second example of pressing operation determination processing using a plurality of pressing detection sensors; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a third example of pressing operation determination processing using a plurality of pressing detection sensors; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a fourth example of pressing operation determination processing using a plurality of pressing detection sensors; FIG. FIG. 16 is a timing chart showing a fifth example of pressing operation determination processing using a plurality of pressing detection sensors; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation containing a special production|presentation. 7 is a timing chart showing an example of lowering position determination processing;

The gaming machine of this embodiment comprises, for example, the following means.
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A gaming area in which games are played;
a frame-shaped front structural member that defines the outer periphery of the play area;
A flat plate-like game panel attached to the rear side of the front component and defining the rear end of the game area;
a unit base attached to the game panel;
A main decorative body attached to the unit base so as to be movable between a retracted position near the peripheral edge and an appearing position near the center in the front view of the game area and visible from the front, and having a predetermined decoration formed thereon. When,
When the main decorations move from the retracted position to the appearing position, the main decorations move from the first position where they overlap each other in front view to the second position where the overlap is eliminated. a plurality of sub-decorations attached and having predetermined decorations formed thereon;
a drive motor mounted on the unit base for moving the main decoration between the retracted position and the appearing position in accordance with a game state that changes as a game is played in the game area;
and an effect display means arranged in the center of the game area in a front view behind the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations, and capable of displaying an effect image. Characterized by

Here, "game" is defined as "a game medium is aimed at a specific receiving port where a special lottery is held to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, and the game medium is delivered to the specific receiving port. When a special lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state occurs due to acceptance is drawn, a specific receiving port for paying out a predetermined number of game media is opened by receiving the game media. "A game in which a game medium is hit", "A game in which a game medium is hit by aiming at a receiving port where benefits including payout of the game medium are given", "After inserting the game medium, a plurality of symbols each provided with a plurality of symbols A game in which the rotation of each of the spinning bodies is stopped so as to form a combination of symbols in which a privilege including the payout of game media is given after rotating the spinning bodies. Examples of the above-mentioned "game media" include "spherical objects (game balls)", "disk-shaped objects (medals)", and the like.

In addition, as the "game area" where the game is played, there are "a plurality of receiving slots into which game media are inserted by the player's operation, and benefits including payout of the game media are given in accordance with the receipt of the game media. "A region where a plurality of symbols are provided", "each of which is provided with a plurality of symbols, which are rotated by the player's start operation when the game medium is inserted, and are stopped by the player's stop operation to combine the symbols. A region in which a plurality of bollards are arranged in which a privilege including payout of game media is provided accordingly”, and the like.

In addition, the "game panel" includes "transparent plate", "opaque plate", etc., and the material includes "plywood (for example, plywood)", "laminated wood", "metal plate", "acrylic resin plate,” “polycarbonate resin plate,” “ABS resin plate,” “polypropylene plate,” “polyarylate resin plate,” “methacrylic resin plate,” “glass plate,” and the like.

Furthermore, the "decoration" of the main decoration and the sub-decoration includes "decoration imitating an item in line with the concept of the game machine", "decoration imitating a logo or lines in line with the concept of the game machine", and "decoration imitating the game machine concept". "Decoration imitating characters in line with the concept of the aircraft", "Decoration with geometric patterns", "Decoration imitating animals and plants", "Decoration imitating landscapes and backgrounds", etc.

In addition, the moving direction of the main decorative body includes "vertical direction", "horizontal direction", "diagonal direction", and the like. In addition, the movement of the "sub-decoration" includes "rotation around an axis extending in the front-rear direction around the main decoration", "movement in the vertical direction", and "movement in the horizontal direction". be done.

In addition, as a moving mechanism for the sub-decoration that moves from the first position to the second position as the main decoration moves from the retracted position to the appearing position, there is a mechanism that "one end is attached to the unit base. and a rod-shaped link member whose other end is attached to the sub-decoration, and when the main decoration moves, the link member pushes or pulls the sub-decoration to move the sub-decoration.” , ``a mechanism in which the main decoration is provided with a gear that rotates with the movement of the main decoration, and the sub decoration is moved by the rotation of the gear'', and the like.

Also, when a plurality of sub-decorations are at the first position, only one sub-decoration may be visible from the front, or a plurality of sub-decorations less than the total number may be visible from the front. You can also use

Further, the "driving motor" includes a "stepping motor", a "DC motor", a "brushless DC motor", an "ultrasonic motor", and the like.

In addition, as the “effect display means”, there are “liquid crystal display device (LCD)”, “cathode ray tube (CRT) display device (CRT)”, “plasma display”, “laser display”, “LED display device”, “organic "EL display device", "electronic paper display device", and the like.

Further, the "effect images" displayed on the effect display means include "effect images displaying characters in accordance with the concept of the gaming machine", "effect images displaying items in accordance with the concept of the gaming machine", "Production image that displays a logo in line with the game machine concept", "Production image that displays dialogue in line with the game machine concept", "Assisting games (e.g., 'right-handed', 'aim at navel') , ``stop button operation timing'', etc.), ``effect image that suggests the game situation such as the number of holds and the number of rounds to the player,'' After that, it is sequentially stopped and displayed, and the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols suggests to the player the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game medium into the starting port. When the combination of displayed symbols satisfies the combination of symbols that generates an advantageous gaming state (for example, "jackpot game") in which the player is advantageous, the remaining symbols are stop-displayed (ready-to-win effect) image)", and "effect image for prompting the player to participate in the player-participation type effect".

By the way, in the conventional technology such as Patent Document 1, a drive motor for moving a plurality of rotary decorations in the vertical direction, a drive motor for rotating the plurality of rotary decorations, and a plurality of rotary decorations. Since it is equipped with a drive solenoid for locking rotation, it is necessary to control many drive means such as drive motors and drive solenoids in order to perform a production (movable production) using multiple rotating decorations. Therefore, the control for the production becomes complicated and the load increases, making it difficult to produce with other decorations at the same time. There was a fear that it could easily become

According to the configuration of means 1, the gaming machine includes a game area in which a game is played, a frame-shaped front structural member that defines the outer circumference of the game area, and a front structural member attached to the rear side of the game area. Between the flat plate-shaped game panel that divides the rear end, the unit base attached to the game panel, and the retracted position near the periphery in the front view game area and the emergence position near the center of the unit base A main decoration mounted movably and visible from the front and having a predetermined decoration formed thereon; a plurality of sub-decorations attached to the main decoration so as to move to a second position where the overlap is eliminated by mutual movement, and a plurality of sub-decorations on which predetermined decorations are formed and attached to the unit base, A drive motor for moving the main decoration between a retracted position and an appearing position in accordance with the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area; a performance display means arranged in the center of the front view game area and capable of displaying a performance image.

As a result, in a normal state, the main decoration is located at the retracted position near the periphery of the front-view gaming area, and the plurality of sub-decorations are located at the first position overlapping each other in the front-rear direction. , a main decoration can be seen near the periphery in the front view game area, and at least one sub-decoration can be seen adjacent to the main decoration, and the game area is decorated with the main decoration and the sub-decoration. It improves the appearance of the game machine. In a normal state, a plurality of sub-decorations positioned at the first position are stacked one on top of the other. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the presence of the sub-decorations arranged on the side, and to make the user recognize that the number of the main decorations and the sub-decorations that are currently visible is the only number. In addition, in a normal state, the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations are in a retracted position near the outer edge of the front-view game area. A displayed performance image is not blocked by a main decorative body or the like, the performance image can be visually recognized in a good condition from the player side, and the player can enjoy the performance image. In this normal state, when the drive motor is driven in accordance with the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area, the main decoration in the retracted position moves to the appearing position near the center of the front view game area. At the same time, the plurality of sub-decorative bodies that overlap in the front-rear direction at the first position move to the second position in which they do not overlap in the front-rear direction. At this time, since (part of) the effect image is blocked by the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations, the player can notice and pay attention to the movement of the main decoration and the like. Therefore, since all the number of sub-decorations appear around the main decoration that has moved to the center of the game area, the increase in the number of sub-decorations can surprise the player, By spreading a plurality of sub-decorations around the decoration, the overall decoration can be enlarged, and a strong impact can be given to the player to suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, since the main decoration can be moved from the retracted position to the appearing position by the drive motor according to the game state, when the game state changes in the normal state where the main decoration is in the retracted position, the main decoration can be moved. Depending on whether or not it moves to the appearance position, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained by heightening expectations for the main decoration. Then, when the main decoration is moved to the appearance position by the drive motor, the plurality of sub-decorations spread around the main decoration, and the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations make it possible for the player to see a large decoration. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, and to increase the player's sense of anticipation for the game, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

Furthermore, by moving the main decoration to the appearance position by driving the drive motor, the player can see a large decoration made up of the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations, and the player's expectation can be heightened. Therefore, it suggests that there is a high possibility (expected value) of occurrence of an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot game") in which the player is advantageous to the player by moving the main decoration to the appearance position. The expected value can be displayed with the main decoration and a plurality of sub-decorations.

In addition, the main decoration is moved to the appearance position near the center in the front view game area, and moving the main decoration to the appearance position makes it easier to secure a space around the main decoration. A plurality of sub-decorations can be moved from the first position to the second position and spread around the main decoration at the appearing position, and the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations form as large a decoration as possible. can do. Therefore, when the main decoration is moved to the appearance position by the driving motor according to the game state, a large decoration made up of the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations spreading around it is presented to the player in the vicinity of the center of the game area. Since it can be shown, the player can be surprised, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the center of the game area, and the large decoration by the main decoration and a plurality of sub-decorations can be enjoyed. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the main decoration is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position by the drive motor, the plurality of sub-decorations are moved from the first position to the second position. Since the sub-decorations are moved, it is sufficient to control only one drive motor when performing a production (movable production) using the main decoration and a plurality of sub-decorations. This load can be reduced. Therefore, when performing an effect using the main decoration and a plurality of sub-decorations, even if an effect using other movable decorations, light-emitting decorations, etc. is performed at the same time, an increase in the load on control of the effect can be avoided. Since it can be suppressed, it is possible to prevent the movement of the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations from being jerky due to the drive motor due to unstable control of the production due to overload. It is possible to provide a game machine that can reliably exhibit the performance effect using the sub-decorative body and achieve the above-described operational effect.

It is desirable that the main decoration is attached to the unit base so as to be vertically movable between a retracted position near the upper edge of the front-view game area and an appearing position. Thus, in a normal state where the main decoration is positioned at the retracted position, the main decoration is visible together with at least one sub-decoration in the vicinity of the upper edge in the front view game area. In this state, when the drive motor is driven in accordance with the game state, the main decoration moves downward together with the plurality of sub-decorations to the appearance position near the center of the front view game area, and the main decoration. Since a plurality of sub-decorations are spread around, the descending of the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations makes the player feel as if a message is given from heaven. This makes it possible to make the player strongly think that an advantageous game state (for example, a ``jackpot game'') will occur in which the player has an advantage, thereby heightening expectations for the occurrence of the advantageous game state and reducing interest. can be suppressed.

Also, one end is rotatably attached to the unit base and the other end is rotatably attached to the sub-decoration, and the plurality of sub-decorations are moved from the first position to the second position. A plurality of rod-shaped link members that move respectively may be further provided. As a result, when the main decoration is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position by the drive motor, the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations move together, but the sub-decorations move through the link member to the unit base. Since it is attached to the main decoration, the sub-decoration that tries to move together with the main decoration is pulled toward the unit base by the link member, and this force changes the position of the sub-decoration relative to the main decoration, The sub-decoration moves from the first position to the second position. On the other hand, when the main decoration moves from the appearance position to the retracted position, the sub-decoration is pushed by the link member, and the sub-decoration moves from the second position to the first position, returning to the initial state (first normal state located in position). Thus, the sub-decoration can be moved from the first position to the second position via the link member simply by moving the main decoration from the retracted position to the appearing position. machine can be realized with certainty.

Furthermore, when the link member as described above is provided, one end of the link member is positioned with respect to the unit base within a range shorter than the moving distance of the main decoration in the moving direction of the main decoration. It is desirable to mount them so that they can slide in the same direction. Thus, when the drive motor moves the main decoration from the retracted position toward the appearing position, the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations move together. At this time, one end of the link member, the other end of which is attached to the sub-decorative body, is attached to the unit base so as to be slidable in the direction of movement of the main decorative body. The link member is pulled in the direction of movement of the main decoration by the sub-decoration that moves to the right, and one end of the link member slides with respect to the unit base. Since one end of the link member is slidable within a range shorter than the moving distance of the main decoration, one end of the link member slides before the main decoration reaches the appearance position. You will reach the end of the direction. After one end of the link member reaches the end in the sliding direction, when the main decoration further moves toward the appearing position, the one end of the link member moves further toward the appearing position. Therefore, the link member pulls the sub-decoration, which tries to move together with the main decoration, toward the unit base, and this force changes the position of the sub-decoration relative to the main decoration. will move from the first position to the second position. Therefore, when the main decoration is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position by the drive motor, the plurality of sub-decorations remain at the first position until one end of the link member reaches the end in the sliding direction. When one end of the link member reaches the end in the slide direction, the main decoration moves in the direction of the appearance position, and the plurality of sub-decorations move from the first position. It moves to the second position and spreads around the main decoration, and the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations make it possible to show the player a movable effect of two-step movement. By controlling it, it is possible to stop the movement (effect) at the first stage, or to move (effect) to the second stage. The variation can be increased, the player can be entertained with various performances, the player can be made less bored, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, when one end of the link member is attached so as to be slidable in the moving direction of the main decoration, the plurality of sub-decorations can be started while the main decoration is moving to the appearance position. to the second position, the speed of moving the sub-decoration to the second position is relatively faster than the moving speed of the main decoration, so that multiple sub-decorations move around the main decoration. It is possible to make the movement as if it suddenly spreads out into the air, and surprise the player to enjoy the performance using the main decoration and a plurality of sub-decorations. Also, in this case, after the main decoration moves from the retracted position toward the appearing position to some extent, the plurality of sub-decorations are moved from the first position to the second position. In other words, the plurality of sub-decorations are moved from the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the front view game area toward the center to some extent, and then moved from the first position to the second position so as to spread around the main decoration. When the decoration moves to the second position, the sub-decoration can be made difficult to abut against other members, and damage to the sub-decoration and other members can be prevented.

Furthermore, as described above, when one end of the link member is slidably attached in the movement direction of the main decoration, when the main decoration is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position, the main decoration is Since the movement of a plurality of sub-decorations can be changed in two steps, the player has an advantage when stopping at the first step and when stopping at the second step. It is possible to recognize that the possibility (expected value) of occurrence of the game state is different, and it is possible to suggest that the expected value is higher in the second stage than in the first stage, and the main decoration body and a plurality of sub decorations can display various expected values to the player.

Also, a plurality of sub-decorations may be attached so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward from the center of the main decoration. Thus, by moving the main decoration from the retracted position to the appearing position, moving the plurality of sub-decorations from the first position to the second position causes the plurality of sub-decorations to rotate around the main decoration. Since the sub-decorative bodies move in such a manner that the sub-decorative bodies spread out, it is possible to show the player a movable effect such that the fan spreads out. Further, by moving the plurality of sub-decorations from the first position to the second position, the plurality of sub-decorations are arranged radially around the main decoration, and the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations It is possible to show the player a decoration that radiates widely with the body. In this way, by performing an effect using the main decoration and a plurality of sub-decorations, it is possible to achieve the same effects as described above, and to give the player a broader impression. It is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, heighten expectations for the game, and suppress a decline in interest.

A pair of sub-decorations arranged on both sides of the main decoration, and a connecting member connecting the pair of sub-decorations and attached to the rear side of the main decoration. When the main decoration moves from the retracted position to the appearing position, the sub-decorations on both sides of the main decoration in front view move from the first position where they overlap each other, and the overlap is eliminated. A plurality of sub-decoration units may be provided to move to the second position. Thus, in the normal state where the main decoration is located at the retracted position, the sub-decorations are visible on both sides of the main decoration. In this normal state, when the main decoration is moved to the appearing position by the drive motor according to the game state, the plurality of sub-decorations overlapping each other on both sides of the main decoration move to the second position. As a result, the mutual overlap is eliminated and spread around the main decoration, so that the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations can be seen as a large decoration to the player, and the same effects as described above can be obtained. can be played. When the plurality of sub-decorations move from the first position to the second position, a pair of sub-decorations with the main decoration in between are connected by a connecting member to form one sub-decoration unit. Therefore, when the connecting member is moved, the pair of sub-decorations can be moved. ), the configuration for moving the sub-decoration can be made simple, and the game machine that exhibits the above-described effects can be easily realized.

Furthermore, as described above, when a plurality of sub-decoration units are provided, the connection member of the sub-decoration unit is attached so as to be rotatable about an axis extending forward and backward about the center of the main decoration. It is desirable to Thus, when the driving motor moves the main decoration from the retracted position to the appearing position according to the game state, the plurality of sub-decoration units extend forward and backward about the center of the main decoration through the connecting member. A plurality of sub-decorations positioned at the first position on both sides of the main decoration and overlapping each other in the front and rear are rotated around the main decoration so as to eliminate the overlap. Since it moves to the second position, it is possible to show the player a movable performance that a fan spreads by the plurality of sub-decorations, and the player can see the decoration that spreads radially with the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations. In addition to being able to show the game, it is possible to give a widening impression to the player to make him think that something good will happen, and to heighten the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, a plurality of main light emitting means are attached to the rear side of the main decoration and can irradiate light forward, and a plurality of sub-decorations are attached to the rear side of each of the sub-decorations and can irradiate light forward. You may make it further provide a several sub light emission means. As a result, when the main light-emitting means and the plurality of sub-light-emitting means are caused to emit light, the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations can be independently light-emitting decorations. , the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the main decoration or the like. Therefore, before the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations are moved from the retracted position to the appearing position by the driving motor, the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations are illuminated by the main light-emitting means and the plurality of sub-light-emitting means. Since the player can be made to pay attention to the main decorations and the like, the player can be excited and thrilled depending on whether or not the main decorations and the like are moved to the appearance position by the drive motor, thereby amusing the player. be able to. Then, when the driving motor moves the main decoration to the appearance position on the central side of the game area and a plurality of sub-decorations spread around the main decoration, the player will be surprised and something good will happen. It is possible to make the player think that this is the case, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game. When the main decoration body is moved to the appearance position on the central side, the main decoration body and the plurality of sub-decoration bodies are illuminated by the main light-emitting means and the plurality of sub-light-emitting means, and the decoration that shines greatly in the center of the game area is played. Since it can be shown to the player, the player can be made to think that an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot game") in which the player is advantageous will occur, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous game state can be heightened. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

In addition, it is desirable to further include an effect display means arranged in the center of the front view game area behind the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations and capable of displaying the effect image. As a result, in a normal state, the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations are at retracted positions near the outer edge of the front-view game area, so that the effect display means is arranged in the center of the front-view game area. The performance image displayed on the side is not blocked by the main decorative body or the like, the performance image can be visually recognized in a good condition from the player side, and the player can enjoy the performance image. In this normal state, if the drive motor is used to move the main decoration to the appearance position in the center of the game area, the effect image (part of it) is blocked by the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations. It is possible to make the player notice and pay attention to the movement of the main decoration, etc., and to show a plurality of sub-decorations that move from the first position to the second position and spread around the main decoration. Therefore, in the center of the game area, a large decoration made up of the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations can be reliably shown to the player, and the game machine can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The main decoration is
It is attached to the unit base so as to be vertically movable between the retracted position and the appearing position near the upper edge of the game area in a front view.

According to the configuration of means 2, the main decorative body is attached to the unit base so as to be vertically movable between the retracted position near the upper edge of the front view game area and the appearing position.

Thus, in a normal state where the main decoration is positioned at the retracted position, the main decoration is visible together with at least one sub-decoration in the vicinity of the upper edge in the front view game area. In this state, when the drive motor is driven in accordance with the game state, the main decoration moves downward together with the plurality of sub-decorations to the appearance position near the center of the front view game area, and the main decoration. Since a plurality of sub-decorations are spread around, the descending of the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations makes the player feel as if a message is given from heaven. This makes it possible to make the player strongly think that an advantageous game state (for example, a ``jackpot game'') will occur in which the player has an advantage, thereby heightening expectations for the occurrence of the advantageous game state and reducing interest. can be suppressed.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"One end is rotatably attached to the unit base and the other end is rotatably attached to the sub-decoration, and the plurality of sub-decorations are mounted from the first position to the a plurality of rod-shaped link members that move to the second position, respectively;
Furthermore, it is characterized by being "equipped".

Here, the ``link member'' may be anything as long as it extends in a bar shape, and is ``one end that is rotatably attached to the unit base and further slidably attached in the direction of the main decoration. "one end of which is rotatably attached to the unit base is non-slidably attached", and the like.

According to the configuration of means 3, the gaming machine has one end rotatably attached to the unit base and the other end rotatably attached to the sub-decoration, and the plurality of sub-decorations from the first position to the second position.

As a result, when the main decoration is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position by the drive motor, the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations move together, but the sub-decorations move through the link member to the unit base. Since it is attached to the main decoration, the sub-decoration that tries to move together with the main decoration is pulled toward the unit base by the link member, and this force changes the position of the sub-decoration relative to the main decoration, The sub decoration moves from the first position to the second position. On the other hand, when the main decoration moves from the appearance position to the retracted position, the sub-decoration is pushed by the link member, and the sub-decoration moves from the second position to the first position, returning to the initial state (first normal state located in position). Thus, the sub-decoration can be moved from the first position to the second position via the link member simply by moving the main decoration from the retracted position to the appearing position. machine can be embodied with certainty.

Means 4: In the configuration of Means 3,
"The link member is
One end is attached to the unit base so as to be slidable in the same direction as the moving direction of the main decoration within a range shorter than the moving distance of the main decoration. do.

Here, as a configuration for attaching the main decorative body slidably in the moving direction, "a link is attached to the tip of a rod-shaped pole member whose base end side is attached to the unit base so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined rotation angle range. A configuration in which one end of a member is rotatably attached”, “A slit extending in the moving direction of the main decoration is formed in the unit base, and one end of the link member is slidable in the slit. and a configuration in which a cylindrical slide pin is provided on the unit base and a slit is formed in the link member so that the slide pin is slidably inserted.

According to the configuration of means 4, one end of the link member is slidably attached to the unit base in the same direction as the moving direction of the main decoration within a range shorter than the moving distance of the main decoration. It is the one that was made.

Thus, when the drive motor moves the main decoration from the retracted position toward the appearing position, the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations move together. At this time, one end of the link member, the other end of which is attached to the sub-decorative body, is attached to the unit base so as to be slidable in the direction of movement of the main decorative body. The link member is pulled in the direction of movement of the main decoration by the sub-decoration that moves to the right, and one end of the link member slides with respect to the unit base. Since one end of the link member is slidable within a range shorter than the moving distance of the main decoration, one end of the link member slides before the main decoration reaches the appearance position. The end of the direction is reached. After one end of the link member reaches the end in the sliding direction, when the main decoration further moves toward the appearing position, the one end of the link member moves further toward the appearing position. Therefore, the link member pulls the sub-decoration, which tries to move together with the main decoration, toward the unit base, and this force changes the position of the sub-decoration relative to the main decoration. will move from the first position to the second position.

Therefore, when the main decoration is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position by the drive motor, the plurality of sub-decorations remain at the first position until one end of the link member reaches the end in the sliding direction. When one end of the link member reaches the end in the slide direction, the main decoration moves in the direction of the appearance position, and the plurality of sub-decorations move from the first position. It moves to the second position and spreads around the main decoration, and the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations make it possible to show the player a movable effect of two-step movement. By controlling it, it is possible to stop the movement (effect) at the first stage, or to move (effect) to the second stage. The variation can be increased, the player can be entertained with various performances, the player can be made less bored, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

More specifically, when the main decoration is moved up to the first stage, the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations move in the direction of the appearance position in the normal state. The player can be entertained by making the player think that something good is about to happen. Then, up to the second stage, that is, when the main decoration is moved to the appearance position, a plurality of sub-decorations spread around the main decoration, and a large decoration is played with the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations. Since the game can be shown to other players, the player can be made to think that an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous will occur, and the player's expectation for the game can be heightened and the player can be encouraged. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, and to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Also, as described above, since the plurality of sub-decorations are moved to the second position while the main decoration is moving to the appearance position, the movement speed of the main decoration is Since the speed at which the sub-decorations move to the second position is relatively fast, a plurality of sub-decorations can be made to suddenly spread around the main decoration, and the main decoration surprises the player. The performance using the body and a plurality of sub-decorations can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, as described above, after the main decoration moves from the retracted position toward the appearing position to some extent, the plurality of sub-decorations are moved from the first position to the second position. In other words, the plurality of sub-decorations are moved from near the periphery of the front-view game area toward the center to some extent, and then moved from the first position to the second position so as to spread around the main decoration. Also, when the plurality of sub-decorations move to the second position, the sub-decorations are less likely to come into contact with other members, and damage to the sub-decorations and other members can be prevented.

In addition, as described above, when moving the main decoration from the retracted position to the appearance position, the movement of the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations can be changed in two steps. It is possible to make the player recognize that the possibility (expected value) of occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous differs between when the game is stopped in the first stage and when the game is stopped in the second stage. The second stage can suggest that the expected value is higher than the first stage, and various expected values can be displayed to the player with the main decoration and a plurality of sub-decorations.

Means 5: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 4,
"The sub-decoration is
It is mounted rotatably about an axis extending forward and backward about the center of the main decorative body.

According to the configuration of means 5, a plurality of sub-decorations are attached rotatably around an axis extending forward and backward about the center of the main decoration.

Thus, by moving the main decoration from the retracted position to the appearing position, moving the plurality of sub-decorations from the first position to the second position causes the plurality of sub-decorations to rotate around the main decoration. Since the sub-decorative bodies move in such a manner that the sub-decorative bodies spread out, it is possible to show the player a movable effect such that the fan spreads out. Further, by moving the plurality of sub-decorations from the first position to the second position, the plurality of sub-decorations are arranged radially around the main decoration, and the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations It is possible to show the player a decoration that radiates widely with the body. In this way, by performing an effect using the main decoration and a plurality of sub-decorations, it is possible to achieve the same effects as described above, and to give the player a broader impression. It is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, heighten expectations for the game, and suppress a decline in interest.

Means 6: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 5,
"A pair of the sub-decorations arranged on both sides of the main decoration,
a connecting member that connects the pair of sub-decorations and is attached to the rear side of the main decoration;
When the main decoration moves from the retracted position to the appearing position, the sub-decorations on both sides of the main decoration in front view move from the first position where they overlap with each other and overlap each other. It comprises a plurality of sub-decoration units that move to the second position that is canceled.

Here, "both sides" of the main decorative body include "left and right sides", "upper and lower sides", "diagonal sides", and the like.

In addition, the ``connecting member'' attached to the main decoration may be ``a member attached rotatably around an axis extending forward and backward from the center of the main decoration'', or ``a member slidable in the vertical direction. "attached to", "attached so as to be slidable in the left-right direction", and the like.

Furthermore, the "sub-decoration unit" includes "a pair of sub-decorations connected by a connecting member whose positions in the front-rear direction are different from each other", and "a pair of sub-decorations connected by a connecting member. The body has the same position in the front-rear direction”, and the like.

According to the configuration of means 6, the game machine has a pair of sub-decorations arranged on both sides of the main decoration, and the pair of sub-decorations are connected to each other. and an attached connecting member, and when the main decoration moves from the retracted position to the appearing position, the sub-decorations on both sides of the main decoration overlap each other in a front view from the first position. This is provided with a plurality of sub-decoration units that move to the second position where the overlap is eliminated by moving to each other.

Thus, in the normal state where the main decoration is located at the retracted position, the sub-decorations are visible on both sides of the main decoration. In this normal state, when the main decoration is moved to the appearing position by the drive motor according to the game state, the plurality of sub-decorations overlapping each other on both sides of the main decoration move to the second position. As a result, the mutual overlap is eliminated and spread around the main decoration, so that the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations can be seen as a large decoration to the player, and the same effects as described above can be obtained. can be played. When the plurality of sub-decorations move from the first position to the second position, a pair of sub-decorations with the main decoration in between are connected by a connecting member to form one sub-decoration unit. Therefore, when the connecting member is moved, the pair of sub-decorations can be moved. ), the configuration for moving the sub-decoration can be made simple, and the game machine that exhibits the above-described effects can be easily realized.

Means 7: In the configuration of Means 6,
"The sub-decoration unit is
The connecting member is mounted rotatably around an axis extending forward and backward about the center of the main decorative body.

According to the configuration of the means 7, the connection member of the sub-decoration unit is attached so as to be rotatable around the axis extending forward and backward about the center of the main decoration.

Thus, when the driving motor moves the main decoration from the retracted position to the appearing position according to the game state, the plurality of sub-decoration units extend forward and backward about the center of the main decoration through the connecting member. A plurality of sub-decorations positioned at the first position on both sides of the main decoration and overlapping each other in the front and rear are rotated around the main decoration so as to eliminate the overlap. Since it moves to the second position, it is possible to show the player a movable performance that a fan spreads by the plurality of sub-decorations, and the player can see the decoration that spreads radially with the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations. In addition to being able to show the game, it is possible to give a widening impression to the player to make him think that something good will happen, and to heighten the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 8: In any configuration of Means 1 to 7,
"a plurality of main light emitting means attached to the rear side of the main decorative body and capable of emitting light forward;
It further comprises a plurality of sub-light-emitting means attached to the rear sides of the plurality of sub-decorative bodies and capable of irradiating light forward.

Here, the "main light emitting means" and the "sub light emitting means" include "single color LED", "full color LED", "high brightness LED", "organic EL", "incandescent bulb", "neon bulb", and "cold light emitting means". cathode tube”, and the like.

According to the configuration of means 8, a plurality of main light-emitting means attached to the rear side of the main decoration and capable of emitting light forward, and a plurality of sub-decorations attached to the rear side of the game machine, and a plurality of sub light-emitting means capable of irradiating light forward.

As a result, when the main light-emitting means and the plurality of sub-light-emitting means are caused to emit light, the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations can be independently light-emitting decorations. , the main decoration and the sub-decoration can be conspicuous, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the main decoration and the like. Therefore, before the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations are moved from the retracted position to the appearing position by the driving motor, the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations are illuminated by the main light-emitting means and the plurality of sub-light-emitting means. Since the player can be made to pay attention to the main decorations and the like, the player can be excited and thrilled depending on whether or not the main decorations and the like are moved to the appearance position by the drive motor, thereby amusing the player. be able to. Then, when the driving motor moves the main decoration to the appearance position on the central side of the game area and a plurality of sub-decorations spread around the main decoration, the player will be surprised and something good will happen. It is possible to make the player think that this is the case, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game. When the main decoration body is moved to the appearance position on the central side, the main decoration body and the plurality of sub-decoration bodies are illuminated by the main light-emitting means and the plurality of sub-light-emitting means, and the decoration that shines greatly in the center of the game area is played. Since it can be shown to the player, the player can be made to think that an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot game") in which the player is advantageous will occur, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous game state can be heightened. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

Means 9: In the gaming machine,
"A gaming area in which games are played;
a frame-shaped front structural member that defines the outer periphery of the play area;
A flat plate-like game panel attached to the rear side of the front component and defining the rear end of the game area;
a unit base attached to the game panel;
It is attached to the unit base so as to be vertically movable and visible from the front between a retracted position near the upper edge of the game area in a front view and an appearing position near the center, and a predetermined decoration is formed. a main decoration with
A pair of sub-decorations arranged on both left and right sides of the main decoration and having a predetermined decoration formed thereon, and a pair of sub-decorations connecting the sub-decorations, centering on the center of the main decoration. two sub-decoration units each having a connecting member attached to the main decoration so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward;
A drive that is attached to the unit base and moves the main decoration vertically between the retracted position and the appearing position in accordance with a game state that changes as a game is played in the game area. a motor;
One end is attached to the unit base so as to be rotatable on both left and right sides of the main decoration on the unit base and slidable in the vertical direction within a range shorter than the movement distance of the main decoration, and the other end is attached to the unit base. of the two sub-decoration units, one of which is rotatably attached to the left sub-decoration and the other to the right sub-decoration, and the main decoration is moved from the retracted position. When moving to the appearance position, the sub-decorations on both left and right sides of the main decoration are rotated in different directions from the first position where the sub-decorations overlap with each other in a front view, and the overlap is eliminated from the second position. two rod-shaped link members for moving to a position;
a plurality of main light emitting means attached to the rear side of the main decoration and capable of emitting light forward;
a plurality of sub-light-emitting means attached to the rear sides of the plurality of sub-decorations and capable of emitting light forward;
and an effect display means arranged in the center of the game area in a front view behind the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations, and capable of displaying an effect image. Characterized by

According to the configuration of the means 9, the game machine includes a game area in which a game is played, a frame-shaped front structural member that defines the outer circumference of the game area, and a front structural member attached to the rear side of the game area. Between the flat plate-like game panel that divides the rear end, the unit base attached to the game panel, and the retracted position near the upper edge in the front view game area and the appearing position near the center of the unit base The main decoration is mounted so that it can be moved vertically and is visible from the front, and the main decoration is formed with a predetermined decoration. a pair of sub-decorations connected to each other, and a connecting member connecting the pair of sub-decorations and attached to the main decoration rotatably about an axis extending forward and backward about the center of the main decoration; and two sub-decoration units attached to the unit base, which move the main decorations to the retracted position and the appearing position according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area. One end of the unit base is rotatable on both left and right sides with the main decoration on the unit base as a boundary and slides vertically within a range shorter than the movement distance of the main decoration. one of the two sub-decoration units is rotatably attached to the left sub-decoration and the other to the right sub-decoration, and the other end is rotatably attached to the main decoration. moves from the retracted position to the appearing position, the left and right side sub-decorations with the main decoration in between overlap each other in a front view, and rotate in different directions from the first position to eliminate the overlap. Two rod-shaped link members for moving to two positions, a plurality of main light emitting means attached to the rear side of the main decoration and capable of irradiating light forward, and a plurality of sub-decorations attached to the rear side. A plurality of sub-light-emitting means, which are respectively attached and capable of irradiating light forward, are arranged rearwardly of the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations and in the center of the front-view game area to produce an effect image. and an effect display means capable of displaying .

As a result, in a normal state, the main decoration is located at the retracted position near the upper edge of the front view game area, and the pair of sub-decorations of the two sub-decoration units are positioned on the main decoration. Since it is positioned at the first position where two left and right sides overlap each other in the front-rear direction, the main decoration can be seen near the periphery in the front view game area, and one sub on each of the left and right sides of the main decoration. The ornaments are visible, and the interior of the game area is decorated with the main ornaments and two sub ornaments to improve the appearance of the game machine. In a normal state, the two sub-decorations positioned at the first position overlap front and back, so only the front sub-decoration can be seen from the front (player side). It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the sub-decorations, and it is possible to make the user recognize that there are only the number of main decorations and sub-decorations that are currently visible. When the main light-emitting means and the plurality of sub-light-emitting means are caused to emit light in a normal state, the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations can be illuminated. The decoration and sub-decoration can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the main decoration and the like. In addition, in a normal state, the main decoration and the two sub-decoration units are at retracted positions near the upper edge of the front-view game area. A performance image displayed on means is not blocked by a main decorative body or the like, the performance image can be visually recognized in a good condition from the player side, and the player can enjoy the performance image.

In this normal state, when the drive motor is driven in accordance with the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area, and the main decoration is moved downward from the retracted position toward the appearing position, the main decoration is displayed. The body and the two sub-decoration body units move (descend) together. At this time, the sub-decorations of one sub-decoration unit on the left side of the main decoration, the sub-decorations of the remaining sub-decoration units on the right of the main decoration, and the other of the link members arranged on the left and right. One end (upper end) of each of the left and right link members is attached to the unit base so as to be slidable in the same vertical direction as the moving direction of the main decorative body. Therefore, the left and right link members are pulled downward in the same direction as the movement of the main decoration by the two sub-decoration units (sub-decorations) that descend together with the main decoration. It will slide against the base. Since the upper ends of the left and right link members can slide vertically within a range shorter than the moving distance (lifting distance) of the main decoration, the left and right links can be slid before the main decoration reaches the appearance position. Each upper end of the link member reaches the lower end in the sliding direction. After the upper end of the link member reaches the lower end in the sliding direction, when the main decoration further moves downward in the direction of the appearance position, the lower end of the link member moves further in the direction of the appearance position (downward). Therefore, one of the two sub-decorations in the two sub-decorations that are about to move together with the main decoration is pulled toward the unit base by the left and right link members. The two sub-decoration units are rotated in different directions about an axis extending in the front-rear direction around the center of the main decoration unit, and the overlap in the front-rear direction is canceled from the first position where the two sub-decoration units are overlapped in the front-rear direction. It will move to a position. As a result, the sub-decorations, which were seen as one on the left and right sides of the main decoration, became two and rotated like a fan, and the main decoration and the main decoration extended radially around the main decoration. It is possible to form one large decoration with two sub-decorations and show it to the player. Therefore, since all the number of sub-decorations appear around the main decoration that has moved to the center of the game area, the increase in the number of sub-decorations can surprise the player, By spreading a plurality of sub-decorations around the decoration, the overall decoration can be enlarged, and a strong impact can be given to the player to suppress the loss of interest.

Further, as described above, when the main decoration is lowered from the retracted position to the appearing position by the drive motor, the left and right sides of the main decoration remain until the upper ends of the left and right link members reach the lower ends in the sliding direction. When the two sub-decorations remain in the first position overlapping each other and move together with the main decoration, and when the upper end of the link member reaches the lower end in the sliding direction, the main decoration moves in the direction of the appearance position ( While moving downward), the two left and right sub-decorations rotate from the first position to the second position where the overlap is eliminated, and spread radially around the main decoration, resulting in the main decoration and the two sub-decorations. Since it is possible to show the player a movable effect that moves in two stages with the body unit, by appropriately controlling the drive motor, the movement (effect) can be stopped at the first stage or moved to the second stage ( It is possible to increase the variation of movable production using the main decoration and a plurality of sub-decorations, and the player can be entertained by various productions, and at the same time, the player can enjoy the game. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the main decoration can be moved from the retracted position to the appearing position by the drive motor according to the game state, when the game state changes in the normal state where the main decoration is in the retracted position, the main decoration can be moved. Depending on whether or not it descends to the appearance position, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained. When the drive motor lowers the main decoration from the retracted position toward the appearing position and moves it to the first stage where the sub-decoration does not rotate, the main decoration and the two sub-decorations return to their normal state. Since the player moves downward while remaining as it is, the player can be made to think that something good will happen, and the player can have a sense of anticipation for the game. Further, in the second step, that is, when the main decoration is lowered to the appearance position, the four sub-decorations spread radially around the main decoration, and the main decoration and the four sub-decorations form a large decoration. can be shown to the player, and the main decoration and the four sub-decorations can make the player feel as if they are being given a message from the sky. It is possible to make a player think that an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous will occur, to raise expectations for the game, and to make it difficult for the player to get tired of the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

In this way, when the main decoration is lowered from the retracted position to the appearance position, the movement of the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations can be changed in two steps. It is possible to recognize that the possibility (expected value) of the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is different between when the game is stopped at and when it is stopped at the second step, and the first step In the second stage, it is possible to suggest that the expected value is higher, and various expected values can be displayed to the player with the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations.

In addition, the main decoration is lowered to the appearance position near the center in the front-view game area. Around the main decoration at the appearance position, the four sub-decorations can be moved from the first position to the second position and spread radially, and the main decoration and the two sub-decorations can be made as large as possible. Decoration can be formed. Therefore, when the main decoration is lowered to the appearance position by the driving motor according to the game state, a large decoration consisting of the main decoration and the four sub-decorations radially extending around it is played in the vicinity of the center of the game area. Since it can be shown to other people, it can surprise the player and strongly attract the player's interest to the center of the game area, and the large decoration made up of the main decoration and the four sub-decorations can be displayed. It is possible to keep the player entertained and suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the main decoration is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position by the drive motor, the two sub-decorations on the left and right sides of the main decoration are moved from the first position to the second position. Since the main decoration and the two sub-decoration units are moved by a motor, one driving motor is required when performing a production (movable production) using the main decoration and the two sub-decoration units. It is only necessary to control only , and the load on production can be reduced. Therefore, when performing an effect using the main decoration and two sub-decorative units, even if an effect using other movable decorations or light-emitting decorations is performed at the same time, the load on control of the effect increases. can be suppressed, it is possible to prevent the movement of the main decoration and multiple sub-decorations from being jerky due to the drive motor due to unstable control of the production due to overload, and the main decoration and It is possible to provide a game machine that reliably exhibits the performance effect using the two sub-decoration units and achieves the above-described operational effects.

In addition, as described above, the two sub-decorations on the left and right sides of the main decoration are moved to the second position while the main decoration is descending to the appearance position. Since the speed of moving the sub-decoration to the second position is relatively faster than the moving speed of , the four sub-decorations can suddenly spread around the main decoration, The player can be surprised and entertained with the performance using the main decoration and the two sub-decoration units.

Furthermore, as described above, after the main decoration moves from the retracted position toward the appearing position to some extent, the sub-decorations on both left and right sides of the main decoration are moved from the first position to the second position. . In other words, the sub-decoration is moved from near the periphery of the front-view game area toward the center to some extent, and then moved from the first position to the second position so as to spread radially around the main decoration. , when the four sub-decorations move to the second position, the sub-decorations can be made less likely to come into contact with other members, and damage to the sub-decorations and other members can be prevented.

In addition, when the main light-emitting means and the plurality of sub-light-emitting means are caused to emit light, the main decoration and the four sub-decorations can be independently light-emitting decorations. The main decoration and the sub-decoration can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the main decoration and the like. Therefore, before the main decoration and the two sub-decorations are moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the main decoration and the left and right sub-decorations are illuminated by the main light-emitting means and the plurality of sub-light-emitting means. Since the player can be made to pay attention to the main decoration or the like by moving the main decoration or the like, it is possible to make the player nervous or excited depending on whether or not the main decoration or the like is moved to the appearance position by the driving motor. can entertain. Then, when the driving motor lowers the main decoration to the appearance position on the central side of the game area and the four sub-decorations spread radially around the main decoration, the player is surprised and something good happens. It is possible to make the player think that this is not the case, and to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the game. When the main decoration is lowered to the appearing position, the main decoration and the four sub-decorations are illuminated by the main light-emitting means and the plurality of sub-light-emitting means, so that the player can see the decoration that shines greatly in the center of the game area. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot game") in which the player is advantageous will occur, and to increase the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous game state and increase interest. A decrease can be suppressed.

In addition, since the effect display means is arranged in the center of the front view game area, when the main decoration is lowered to the appearance position in the center of the game area by the driving motor, the main decoration and the two sub-decorations are displayed. Since (a part of) the effect image is blocked by the body unit, it is possible to make the player notice the descent of the main decoration, etc., and make the player pay attention to it, and move from the first position to the second position to move around the main decoration. You can show four sub-decorations that spread radially with . Therefore, in the center of the game area, a large decoration made up of the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations can be reliably shown to the player, and the game machine can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

Means 10: In the configuration of any one of Means 1 to 9,
The game machine is
a game area into which a game medium is driven by a player's operation;
a plurality of receiving ports arranged in the game area and capable of receiving game media;
A pachinko machine comprising a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the reception of game media into the receiving slot.

Here, the ``acceptance opening'' includes a ``general prize winning opening that is always open within the game area'', and a ``advantageous game state that is always open within the game area and gives an advantage to the player by accepting game media.'' A start prize winning opening (starting opening) where a special lottery is held to determine whether to generate a Acceptable variable winning gates (variable starting gates, prize winning gates, etc.)”, “Normal lottery drawn by game media passing through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) within the game area Depending on the result, a variable winning opening (variable starting opening, prize winning opening, etc.) that can accept game media, "a specific area within the game area (e.g., gate, chucker, etc.) Depending on the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game medium, it is possible to accept the game medium, and a variable start is performed to perform a special lottery as to whether or not to generate an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous due to the acceptance of the game medium. Winning opening (variable starting opening)", "V winning opening that generates an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous when the game medium received in the accessory winning opening is sorted and received by the distribution means", " Advantageous gaming states in which the player is advantageous include a "big prize winning opening and a prize winning opening that opens and closes in a predetermined pattern to accept game media".

In addition, the ``pachinko machine'' includes ``lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting game media into the starting port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means. A special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result drawn by the combination of the stopped and displayed special symbols after variably displaying the special symbols in response to the display, and displaying an advantageous game state in the special lottery result display means. Advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state by opening and closing a large winning opening in a predetermined pattern when a special lottery result to be generated is displayed (so-called digipachi machine), A distribution means for distributing the game media received in the mouth, and when the game media distributed by the distribution means are received in the V winning port, the prize winning port is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to give an advantage to the player. Advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state (so-called Hanemono machine)", "has a large winning opening and a prize winning opening, and is drawn by receiving game media into the starting opening Depending on the result of the special lottery, the large prize winning opening or the special prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and when the game medium received in the special prize winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the special prize winning opening or the special prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. (a so-called multi-function machine) having advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous by opening and closing in a pattern of .

According to the configuration of the means 10, the game machine comprises a game area into which a game medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of receiving ports which are arranged in the game area and are capable of receiving the game medium, and a game machine into the receiving port. and a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the receipt of the media. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, it is possible to obtain the effects of any of the means described above.

The effect (movable effect) in which the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations are moved by the drive motor is desirably executed when the game medium driven into the game area is received by the receiving slot. As a result, when game media are received in the receiving slot, a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and an effect is executed in which the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations move, thereby amusing the player. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to continue the shooting of the game media aiming at the receiving slot, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, a special lottery is performed to generate an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous by accepting the game medium into the starting port, and the result of the special lottery is presented to the player when suggesting the result of the lottery to the player. As one of the effects, the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations may be moved by a driving motor. As a result, by moving the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player due to the effects described above and to entertain the player. A lottery result can make a player think that an advantageous game state (for example, ``jackpot'') will occur, and heighten expectations for the occurrence of the advantageous game state, thereby suppressing a decline in amusement. can be made In addition, as described above, by moving the main decoration and a plurality of sub-decorations, it is possible to show the player a movable effect with a higher effect, so that the player is suggested the result of the special lottery. It can be suitably used for an effect (for example, a ready-to-win effect) to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 11: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 9,
The game machine is
a plurality of hull bodies each having a plurality of graphics;
a starting operation unit that rotates each of the plurality of rotating bodies by being operated by the player after the game medium is inserted;
a plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies;
A slot machine comprising a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with a combination of stop symbols by all of the rotating bodies whose rotation is stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operation parts respectively. characterized by being

Here, the ``slot machine'' includes ``a machine in which the number of effective lines for determining a combination of stop symbols changes according to the number of game media (medals) used in one game'', and ``a slot machine with a An internal lottery is executed with the start of rotation, and benefits that are advantageous to the player are given according to the combination of the stop symbols and the result of the internal lottery drawn. It is done", etc. In addition, as "privileges", "big bonus (BB)", "regular bonus (RB)", "cherry rush bonus (CRB)", "replay", "long replay time (LRT)", "assist time ( AT)”, and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 11, the game machine comprises a plurality of spinning bodies each having a plurality of patterns, and a starting operation section that rotates the plurality of spinning bodies by being operated by the player after the game medium is inserted. and a plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of each of the plurality of rotating bodies, and the stop symbols by all the rotating bodies whose rotation is stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operating parts. and a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine, it is possible to obtain the effects of any of the means described above.

In addition, in the effect (movable effect) in which the main decoration and a plurality of sub-decorations are moved by the drive motor, the combination of symbols whose rotation is stopped except for one on the effective line satisfies the winning symbol combination. As one of the effects presented to the player when the game is being played (so-called reach), the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations may be moved by a drive motor. As a result, the movement of the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations can strongly attract the player's interest, and the operation of the stop operation section can be enjoyed so as to win a winning combination. Further, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations may be moved by the driving motor, whereby the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations are moved. Since the movement can give a strong impact to the player, if the player stops at a specific combination of symbols, an advantageous game state (for example, "BB") is generated in which the player is advantageous. It is possible to make the players think of the game, raise the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous game state, and suppress the deterioration of the interest. In addition, as described above, by moving the main decoration and a plurality of sub-decorations, it is possible to show the player a movable effect with a higher effect, so the internal lottery is suggested to the player. It can be suitably used for an effect for the sake of the game, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 12: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 9,
The game machine is
It is characterized by being a fusion machine that fuses a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

Here, a "combined machine" that fuses a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine means that after inserting a plurality of game media, a pattern row consisting of a plurality of patterns according to the operation of a start operation part (for example, an operation lever) is variably displayed, and after that, the variation of the symbol row is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation unit (eg, stop button), and game media are paid out according to the combination of the stopped symbols, or benefits advantageous to the player (eg , advantageous game state). It should be noted that if the stop operation unit is not operated even after a predetermined period of time has passed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped in response to the passage of the predetermined period of time.

According to the configuration of means 12, the game machine is a hybrid machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined. As a result, any one of the effects of the above-described means can be achieved in a hybrid machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined.

In addition, in the effect (movable effect) in which the main decoration and a plurality of sub-decorations are moved by the drive motor, the combination of symbols whose rotation is stopped except for one on the effective line satisfies the winning symbol combination. As one of the presentations presented to the player when the game is being played (so-called reach time), a drive motor may be used to move the main decoration and a plurality of sub-decorations, or an internal lottery may be performed. When the lottery result is a winning combination, the drive motor may be used to move the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. be. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 99) is driven by.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. a lower outer frame assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40 .

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 are connected to the main body frame 4 and the main body. It is for coaxially supporting the lower frame hinge assembly 520 so as to be rotatable, and attaching the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in front view.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. By inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operating section 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the performance operating section 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. , the player can participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by the operation of the performance operation section 301.例文帳に追加

The body frame 4 has a frame-like body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 for putting out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the body frame base 501 are covered. A back cover 640 and a locking unit 650 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, pays out the game ball B to the player side, and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The main body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side of the front so that the door frame 4 can be opened and closed. is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front constituent member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front constituent member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and peripherals arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 attached to. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emitting effects according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in contact with the game ball B, and a predetermined privilege ( For example, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 that provide a predetermined number of game balls B), It has The obstacle nail is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The general winning opening 2001 , the first starting opening 2002 , the gate section 2003 , the second starting opening 2004 , the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000 .

A game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 by the player. As a result, the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the gate part 2003, the second starting hole 2004, the first big winning hole 2005, the second big winning hole 2006, etc. in the game area 5a, The player can be entertained with the driving operation of the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

In addition, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image, the display effect unit 2600, and the lower movable effect according to the game state changed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. The unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like can be used to perform movable effects and light emitting effects to entertain the players.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 together, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 when the main body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2 , the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 . The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by means of the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in the front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. A left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2 . It is for attaching the body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 .

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 includes a concave portion 11a that is flat and concave to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a portion that is opposite to the concave portion 11a on the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The left outer frame member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 to be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the portion 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 while the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11 . The upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing portion 12a in contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left side cutout portion 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 13a extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and rightward from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. and a flat plate-like abutting portion 13d that extends short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the contact portion 13 d against the front surface of the bulging portion 11 b of the left outer frame member 11 and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13 b against the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, thereby It is attached to the left frame member 11 . The left lower connecting member 13 has the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the left side cutout portion 41a of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 includes a right outer frame member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, and the right outer frame member 21. and a lower hooking member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed leftward at the rear portion of the right side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a left side surface that is opposite to the recess 21a. It has a bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The right outer frame member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the right outer frame member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces thereof. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10 .

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper right connecting member 22 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the portion 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, and the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the right outer frame member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21 while the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing portion 22a in contact with the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a in the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and left from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. and a flat plate-like contact portion 23d that extends short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 has the rear surface of the abutting portion 23 d in contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21 b of the right outer frame member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23 b on the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a in contact with the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a in the right side surface of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

An outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 to be described later is hooked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 . The upper hooking member 24 has a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The upper hooking member 24 extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 24b to which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked is provided.

The lower hooking member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction. and a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same lateral length as the lateral length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 to be described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 has cutout portions 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left and right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the cutout portions 30a on the left and right ends and attached.

In addition, the outer frame upper member 30 has a mounting stepped portion 30b at the left end portion in which the upper surface and the front surface are recessed from the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment stepped portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 which is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped rear panel member 43 extending to the left and right, which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 a mechanism 44;

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutout portions 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into the cutout portions 41a on both the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the panel rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear in the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. As shown in FIG.

The front panel member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the panel front member 42 with the panel rear member 43, the panel interior becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the panel rear member 43. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The rear panel member 43 extends in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to the front surface of the panel rear member 43 , the panel internal space 40 a that forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is formed in cooperation with the panel front member 42 . The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connection tube portion 43a extending in the left-right direction, projecting upward, and communicating with the inner space 40a of the panel at the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43 . In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 the length of the entire rear panel member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the rear panel member 43 as a whole. is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting tube portion 43a. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection tube part 43a, thereby connecting the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624. FIG.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is arranged such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, thereby preventing the game ball B from being held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. to prevent it from being caught.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so as to face the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the placement portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and having an upper surface inclined upward toward the rear. and a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position coinciding with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size through which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear panel member 43 . Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged behind the curtain plate rear member 43. As shown in FIG.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an illegal tool such as piano wire from being inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. A standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end projecting portion 44e that protrudes forward provided at the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 .

By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B tends to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged behind the curtain board rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 arranged on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43 with a left-right spacing, and closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear side. and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which is mounted inside the front panel member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43 a of the rear panel member 43 .

The pair of guide members 45 are in contact with the lower end of the door frame 3 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punching metal with numerous small holes. The port member 47 communicates the inner space 40a (enclosure 624) of the curtain board and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 with two cylinders. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the low-pitched sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (within the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. , a rich low-pitched sound can be radiated forward of the outer frame 2 (toward the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. and prevents the sound in the enclosure of the speaker from leaking from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and viewed from above, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recessed portion 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and the outer frame upper hinge member 51. and a mounting screw 53 for mounting the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 .

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is in the form of a horizontally extending flat plate and extends forward from an upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-like forward extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the forward extending portion 51b to the center of the forward extending portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and an end edge extending downward from the left side of the forward extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. A flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band plate-like lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and an operation piece 52b extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It has an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by an attaching screw 53, at a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 , the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the edge of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 . It extends forward so as to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. As shown in FIG. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 in the vicinity of the front end is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 has a flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and having a size through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrower upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. 60 d of discharge holes are formed in the horizontal part 60a so that it may contact|connect the center part of the front-back direction of the rising part 60b, and may extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal part 60a in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball jam prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 .

In the outer frame lower hinge member 60 assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is placed on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screwed (not shown). It is fixed to the rear panel member 43 by . The raised portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is separated from the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 60.例文帳に追加

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 closing the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. a handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100; a door frame left side unit 400 attached to the tray unit, a door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a vertically extending quadrangular (rectangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, and having a door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner when viewed from the rear, and mounted near the right end on the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the rear side. a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the door frame main relay board 104; The door frame relay board cover 107 covers the rear handle relay board 106, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the handle rear relay board 106 is covered from the rear side. It has a post-handle relay board cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to it. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 .

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 . The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is ejected into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game to hit into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 at the left side in front view, and closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so as to be opened and closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 with an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting a handle unit 180, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view.

The door-frame base unit 100 also includes a door-frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in the rear view of the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101, and a door-frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted to the left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side and covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable are provided. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame top hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the bottom corner of the front surface, a plate unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 400 at the front surface of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 101 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape with an inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door window 101a has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery thereof, and is close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and a lower side forming the inner periphery extends vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b, which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted is recessed near the right end in the front view from the front to the front and the insertion recess 101c. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the front view. and a ball feed opening 101e for facing the ball.

In addition, the door frame base 101 penetrates in the front and back at a position near the center in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. a passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper tray that penetrates in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a in the vicinity of the left end in a front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, and a door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of longitudinally long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper tray ball passage opening 101g) when viewed from the front and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of slits 101i are such that the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is positioned in front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is positioned behind. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The handlebar mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion 102a. a plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c projecting into the portion 102a and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and arranged at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a; , and reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

The handle mounting member 102 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b with a screw while the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The cylindrical portion 102 a has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 . One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed in the handle base 181 at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c. Therefore, in the handle mounting member 102, the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

Since the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend forward right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1c. speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the tubular portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided forward. Through the speaker opening 211b in the plate unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be favorably guided forward (toward the player).

Moreover, the speaker duct 103 has a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board/Door frame secondary relay board/Handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the rear handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 (see FIG. 83). and FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape by combining a square extending left and right on the right side of the upper part of the square extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame secondary relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410 side. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the body frame 4, The remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door-frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are arranged so that the vertically extending parts of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are connected to the door. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107 , and the rear side of the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150 .

The post-handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear handle relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, rear handle relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (the part extending vertically in an inverted L shape) are covered. cover the sides. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and the left side when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door-frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door-frame relay board cover 107 and can be opened. A connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side of the housing and connected to these terminals.

The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106 . The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 with a wiring cable (not shown). It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending in the left and right direction, and has openings formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cables.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 . An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position near the upper end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115, which are connected to the right reinforcing frame 112, are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 with a vertical gap therebetween, and the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 are engaged. and a hooking member 116 that is attached.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically by a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101 . The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted through these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 . The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101 .

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends laterally with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 . The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch portion 114a that is rectangularly cut downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end. The notch portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear piece portions which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction and formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It has a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece portion connecting the front ends of the pair of front extending portions to each other. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112 . A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 .

The hooking member 116 is attached to an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 . Door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked to these hooking members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching and molding metal plates. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 assembled along the left side, right side, and upper side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114. , is assembled to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

[3-1 g. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a locking spring 124 biasing the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like attachment piece 121a that is square in front view, and flat plate-like projecting pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the attachment piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 at the attachment piece 121a. Hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends upward. The portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 .

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121 . The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123 .

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is fully extended. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 or removed downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 , so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 . can be supported as much as possible.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 .

[3-1h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and rectangular in front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. A door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the projecting piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer circumference of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is positioned coaxially with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125b. installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 rotatably with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. can be done.

[3-1i. cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650, which will be described later, to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing and locking with. The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131. and a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

A cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind and has a rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and the rotation transmission member 133 is formed in opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200 (see FIG. 22, etc.).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. FIG. 34(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 34(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the tampering prevention member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and also the game balls stored in the upper tray 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222. - 特許庁

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the inlet 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open end and a box-shaped front cover 141 with a closed rear end and an open front, and a game ball entered from an entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying ball B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extraction member 143 having a partition part 143a partitioning between an entrance port 141a and a ball extraction port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a rear cover 142 for game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported about an axis extending vertically between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entry port 141a in a front view, and a ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144 .

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball extracting port 141b in front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. The upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entry port 141a. And, it is formed so as to close from the rear side the portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball removal guideway 241c.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b on the lower side of the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and the partition portion 143a. Extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball outlet 141b. a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b; and the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. and a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34(a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 that moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 144a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the entrance port 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143, and a cut-off portion 144a behind the cut-off portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of the rotation shaft, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding member 144 rotates about the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a feed position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540, and enters the partition portion 143a from the entry port 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. As a result, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which swings vertically. and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by movement of the ball feeding member 144 and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operating rod 146 has an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. It is When the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed actuation rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward (upward) the ball feed solenoid 145 due to the magnetic force generated, thereby feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. and return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 near the ball feeding crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feeding solenoid 145 .

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction which can be engaged with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which moves up and down, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b is disposed on the opposite side of the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the shaft portion 147b extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , and a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35(b)) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned at the supply position. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 144 is in the holding position. rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 117) of the payout control board 633.

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the rotatably supported ball extraction member 143 or the weight 143d. However, the actuating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 may contact the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper dish ball extracting slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper dish ball extracting button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b in a normal state to partition the ball removal port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter into.

Then, when the player presses downward the upper tray ball removal button of the tray unit, the upper tray ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission section, and the operation rod 143c moves downward along with the movement of the operation transmission section. will also move relatively downward. When the operation rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to form a partition. is released. As a result, the game ball B entering from the inlet 141a falls to the side of the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guideway 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242b with which the operation rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 abuts is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, and it is possible to prevent the ball extraction member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B can be inserted into the partition Rebounding at 143a can be prevented.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 35(b), etc.) recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the back of the batted ball feed port 142a in the rear cover 142. An anti-tampering member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proof member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is made of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. . The upper piece 148a of the anti-tamper member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-tamper member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece 148b extends flush with the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. As shown in FIG. As a result, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this tampering prevention member 148, an illicit game ball B to which a string is attached is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illicit game ball B. The force of the illegal game ball B shot (hit ball) by the ball launching device 540 when a fraudulent act is performed such as operating the string to put the illegal game ball B into or out of the first start opening or the like. By inserting the string attached to the illegal game ball B between the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b, the V shape formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b It can be cut by the narrowed part of the string, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1k. foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. FIG. 36(a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 36(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and having an open front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152 and .

The foul cover unit 150 has a penetrating ball passage 150a that penetrates front to back at the upper left corner in a front view, and communicates the normal guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 with the upper dish ball supply port of the dish unit; A full-tank ball receiving port 150b that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through-ball passage 150a in front view and can communicate with the full-tank guideway of the lower full-tank ball path unit of the body frame 4 is provided. .

In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and despite being shot by the ball launching device of the body frame 4, it did not reach the game area 5a. A foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B received in a full ball receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving port 150c opened forward near the lower right corner in a front view. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port of the plate unit is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the cover member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passageway 150e having a possible width is provided.

The ball-through passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 . The full tank ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. As shown in FIG. The ball outlet 150d is formed in the lid member 152. As shown in FIG. A storage passage 150 e is formed by a unit main body 151 and a lid member 152 .

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and the movable piece 153 and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is kept inside the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full-tank detection sensor 154 . As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, the fact can be notified to the player, the staff of the game hall, or the like, and they can be urged to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the penetrating ball passage 150a. A door opening/closing abutting portion 150f with which the operating projection 613a of the door 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b ( front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. As shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front). It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 161 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for mounting the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. and a mounting member 163 .

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 161a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. A mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with a projecting portion 163 b of a glass unit mounting member 163 . The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base portion 163a mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a projecting portion 163b. The glass unit mounting members 163 are rotatably mounted outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101 . After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the projecting portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101 .

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is regulated by the projecting portion 163b when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the projecting portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally removed from the door frame base 101 .

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 170 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-like rear projecting piece 172 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 .

A main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1 . More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 171 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171 . Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . A rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed along a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. ing.

In addition, the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B shot by the ball shooting device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area is It does not hinder the hitting of the game ball B into 5a.

A pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100 .

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front structural member 1000 . In addition, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000 . . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to hit the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and a handle 182 covering the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration substrate 184 and a handle cover 185 attached to the cover base 183 .

The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and the handle 182 attached to the front end of the handle unit 180. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186 .

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (counterclockwise rotation end when viewed from the front). A biasing handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to an inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to a transmission gear 188, rotates a detection shaft 189a of a handle rotation detection sensor 189 clockwise when viewed from the front. and an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. and an operation sensor 194 .

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end portion 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. and three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. A base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102 . Also, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handlebar mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are positioned in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes non-rotatable relative to the handle attachment member 102 .

The handle 182 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d which protrude outwardly away from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape from the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center from the slit 182e. and a locking protrusion 182f.

The four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a protrudes outward from the portion protruding most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (gouged out) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second projection 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first projection 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 85 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. protrudes slightly lower. The second projection 182b protrudes so that the clockwise side surface in the front view of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the counterclockwise side surface, which is the opposite side, curves inward. and is formed in a shape similar to that of the first projection 182a.

The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. Both side surfaces of the third projection 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the clockwise side surface is inclined more gently than the opposite counterclockwise side surface. The portion of the fourth projection 182d that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the third projection 182c that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. It also protrudes slightly higher. Both sides of the fourth projection 182d are inclined substantially linearly, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle shape.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disc shape and has three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through slits 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within an angle of rotation of approximately 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward and is translucent. The handle cover 185 is internally provided with a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The steering wheel cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decoration substrate 184 .

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. As shown in FIG. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in a plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the hole is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the rotation operation without any sense of incongruity.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.例文帳に追加

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the player and detects the static electricity acting on the player's handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a manner different from the original to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

Also, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation of the single shot button 193. Firing solenoid 542 is de-energized. As a result, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 182, and by canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, the single-shot button 193 can be operated before the operation. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a again with the hitting strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 can be rotated most clockwise when viewed from the front. so that the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hit"), the fourth projection 182d is the first projection 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the player can comfortably maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position by switching the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a. To reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and the upper plate 201 arranged below the upper plate 201 and game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. and a lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower tray 202 attached to the front surface of the tray base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-like dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having the upper dish 201 , and a right side of the upper dish body 212 . A mounting base 213 that is attached to and protrudes forward, a plate unit relay board 214 that is attached to the right of the mounting base 213, a ball rental operation unit 220 that is attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, It has an upper tray before ball removal unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213 and an upper tray after ball removal unit 240 attached behind the upper tray before ball removal unit 230. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower part of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish main body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. a lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251; a plate upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with a space left and right; A plate upper right decoration unit 275 and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 are provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes, as a performance operation unit 301 operable by the player, a rotary operation unit 302 rotatable by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 operable by the player. The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular performance operation ring 330 having a rotation operation portion 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation portion 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation portion 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 that lights up the effect operation ring 330, the decoration board cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation part base 320. an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330; and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320. and have.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the production operation unit 301 at the center in the left-right direction faces diagonally upward and forward, and the left side of the production operation unit 300 on the upper surface. An upper tray 201 is arranged on the right side of the performance operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower tray 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 under the upper tray 201. - 特許庁

[3-5a. Fine plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward from the left-right center in a front view and opens upward. The upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212) bulges most forward at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes to the right in front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper tray 201 including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a in front view is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.例文帳に追加

When the upper tray 201 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper tray 201 is positioned below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211, and the game balls touch the upper end of the upper tray ball supply port 211e. It inclines so that it may become low toward the position of a little lower side than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be discharged from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

In addition, the guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game ball Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5b. lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower tray 202 is arranged below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the horizontal center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in front view. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. - 特許庁The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a through which the game balls B can be ejected through the bottom wall in the vertical direction. A lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by a lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom plate 202 is inclined so that its bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is positioned below the production operation unit 300 in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in the assembled state of the tray unit 200. - 特許庁

The lower tray 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a can be opened. The stored game balls B can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the ball is moved forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The discharged game ball B can be rapidly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a front perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit, and FIG. 44 is a rear perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached on the front surface.

The dish base unit 210 includes a flat plate-like dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the upper plate main body 212 on the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and protruding forward, and a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. and a plate unit relay board 214 .

The plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , and an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 211 behind the upper tray ball removal front unit 230. - 特許庁

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends laterally across the entire width of the door frame base 101. box).

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view and extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear, and an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the front and rear direction below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at a lower portion on the left side of the left-right center in front view, and a lower plate. A notch portion 211d cut in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c to a size through which the game ball B can pass, and a front view upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. an upper tray ball feeding port 211e extending vertically and having an upper portion located at the right end of the upper tray main body 212. - 特許庁

The plate unit base 211 has a mounting projection 211f on which the mounting base is placed, which projects forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and an upper plate portion 211f on the left side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. A slider insertion opening 211g through which an operation transmission part 242b of an upper tray ball removal slider 242 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is inserted is passed through the lower part of the plate body in the front-rear direction, and a front-view lower right corner penetrates the plate body in the front-rear direction. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion opening 211h that penetrates in the front-rear direction near the right corner in front view and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. and a mouth 211i.

The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has its front end opened in the rear wall of the upper tray 201 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and its cylindrical rear end through which the upper tray balls of the door frame base 101 pass. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

The lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 202 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the lower tray ball passage opening 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects with the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150 . As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. A notch portion 211d formed in a cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is connected to the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are released by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222, the upper tray ball feed port 211e, the entrance port 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feed unit 140, and the upper tray ball feed port 211e. The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 after tray ball removal, and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feeding opening 211e is positioned in front of the ball receiving opening 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240 in the state assembled to the tray base unit 210, and the game balls in the upper tray 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 . The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper plate body 212 recedes rearward as it goes rightward in front view from the most forwardly bulging portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The top plate main body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion near the right end, whose upper part is closed, slips under the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled to the plate unit 200 . In addition, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a in the middle portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in the shape of a shallow box with an open top. The mounting base 213 has an insertion hole 213a vertically penetrating near the left end, and a through hole 213b vertically penetrating at the right corner of the rear end.

The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is through which the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball removal front unit 230 is inserted. A wiring cable for connecting the ball rental operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 includes the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the plate upper left decorative board 273, the plate upper right decorative board 278, the plate lower left decorative board 283, and the plate lower right decorative board 288. , and the operation unit relay board 392 . The plate unit relay board 214 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. The rear surface of the plate unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211 when attached to the plate unit base 211 .

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball rental operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 via the attachment base 213 . This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed, and the ball lending machine This is for returning the cash or prepaid card put into the machine after deducting the amount of the rented game ball B.例文帳に追加

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper tray ball ejection button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper tray ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A translucent disk-shaped ball rental operation base 223 arranged on the right side of the withdrawal button 222, a ball rental button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball rental operation base 223, and a ball rental operation. A return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged on the lower rear portion of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

The upper tray ball ejection button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball ejection button 222 . When the ball lending button 224 is pressed after cash or a prepaid card with a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201 . When a return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine and returned. The remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed on the ball lending display section. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display section when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before upper tray ball removal and unit after upper tray ball removal]
The unit 230 before ball removal and the unit 240 after ball removal of the upper plate in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper tray ball before unit 230 and the upper tray after ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging the game balls B stored inside to the lower tray 202 .

The upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 . The upper bowl post-ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion behind the upper bowl ball removal pre-unit 230 on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 .

The upper tray ball removal front unit 230 includes a cylindrical front base 231 attached to the front surface of the tray unit base 211 and extending vertically, and a front base 231 inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be vertically movable. and a slider 232 . The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 near the front of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper tray ball removal button 222, and its lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240. It abuts on the top surface.

The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. an upper tray ball removal slider 242 slidably attached to the top, a spring 243 urging the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241, It has

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, and has a ball receiving opening 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving opening 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b for guiding the accepted game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guiding it backward, and a game from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241. A ball extraction guideway 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view is provided.

The ball receiving port 241a is installed in the plate base unit 210 and extends forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guiding passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an open position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is positioned at the rear of the lower portion in the assembled state of the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The laterally extending portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c protrudes to the right in rear view from the portion where the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side in rear view. A rear cover 244 closes the rear side of the portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending to the left and right. The upper portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c that extends vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when assembled to the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end of the laterally extending portion as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211 . As a result, the game ball B ejected from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is ejected into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper bowl ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an operation receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface, which is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a, projecting rearward. and an operation transmission portion 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a lower surface that extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving section 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion opening 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the . When the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball extracting member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided on the upper surface. The rod 143c abuts.

The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper disk ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper disk ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243 .

In the upper bowl ball extraction front unit 230 and the upper bowl ball extraction unit 240, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is moved upward. The front slider 232 abuts on the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a, and the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is positioned at the upper movement end. In addition, since the urging force of the spring 243 positions the upper disk ball removal slider 242 at the upper movement end, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to separate the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the ball is fed from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving opening 241a. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the hitting ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring 243, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is operated. The actuating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b, can move downward, and the ball removing member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143, and the partition portion 143a. retreats from between the entry port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entry port 141a through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feed guide path 241b from the upper tray 201 is discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b that opens below the entry port 141a. It will be done. Then, the game ball B ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b passes through the ball extraction guide path 241c and is guided into the lower dish ball supply port 211c from the notch 211d. The game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the tray 202 and discharged into the lower tray 202 .

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is moved through the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball removal button 222 rises, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c in contact with the operation transmission part 242b, and the partition part 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to its original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before the upper tray ball is removed and the unit 240 after the upper tray ball is removed. It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. 47 is a front perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit, and FIG. 48 is a rear perspective view of the dish decoration unit. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the horizontal direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 includes a lower dish main body 251 attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and forming the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. 211, a lower tray ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and the trays attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 with a space left and right. An upper left decorative unit 270 and an upper right plate decorative unit 275, and a lower left plate decorative unit 280 and a lower right plate decorative unit attached below the upper left plate decorative unit 270 and upper right plate decorative unit 275 on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and .

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 . The lower plate main body 251 extends left and right and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that is open at the top and rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to the lower front portion of the tray unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250 , the outer periphery and part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 . In addition, the bottom surface of the lower tray main body is located below the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211 when assembled with the tray unit 200. 211c. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200 . The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. The top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The plate unit main body 252 has upper side protrusions 252a which bulge forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart from the left and right at the bottom. has a lower front decorative portion 252b protruding forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c extending rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and are provided on the front surfaces of the upper left and lower plate decoration units 270 and 280, respectively, and the upper right and lower right plate decoration units 275 and 280, respectively. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b at the right end of the lower surface. In addition, the right upper side swelling portion 252a is connected at its lower end to the lower front decoration portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side swelling portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulge 252a.

In addition, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decoration portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. and a bottom cutout portion 252f that is cut at a portion below the . A lower tray ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g that penetrates the bottom right corner of the front decoration part 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylindrical part 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. The effect operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are central in the left-right direction. A production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled with the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . In addition, when the plate decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is positioned. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5d-3. Lower tray ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a, the game ball B is stored in the lower tray 202 and the game ball B is discharged from the lower tray 202. It is intended for

The lower pan ball extractor unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower pan main body 251 and includes a flat plate-like lower pan ball extractor base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower pan ball extractor base 261 . A slider 262 attached to the upper surface of the base 261 so as to be slidable forward and backward, a lower dish ball release button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 biasing the slider 262 forward, A lower tray ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower tray ball removal cover 265 in an open state via the slider 262 are provided.

The lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed in a size to close the bottom notch 252f of the tray unit main body 252, and is vertically aligned with the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 (lower tray main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The slider 262 has a projecting pin projecting upward in a cylindrical shape.

The lower tray ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower tray ball removal base 261 so as to be rotatable about a vertically extending axis at a position to the left of the slider 262 on the left end side, and is attached to the slider 262 on the right end side. , and the right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower disk ball removal lid 265 is formed with a laterally extending slit into which the projecting pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower tray ball removal base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower tray ball release button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the tray unit main body 252. As shown in FIG. In the normal state, the slider 262 is positioned at the front moving end by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is positioned directly above the through hole. and closes the through hole (lower tray ball extraction hole 202a).

In this normal state, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加In addition, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower tray ball release button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is pushed backward to move backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower tray ball ejection button 263. becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower disk ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower disk ball removal cover 265 moves rearward on the right side with the left side as the center. It rotates in the moving direction. Then, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 positioned directly above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, thereby opening the through hole and opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged downward from the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower tray ball eject button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower tray ball eject button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264 . As a result, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game ball B in the lower tray 202 is continuously released. It can be discharged downward.

In order to close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, is pushed backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. be. Then, when the pressure on the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower tray ball ejection button 263 returns to the state in which it is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is positioned directly above the through hole, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by the lower tray ball removal lid 265 . Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decorative unit and plate upper right decorative unit]
The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252 a of the plate unit main body 252 . The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper part of the plate unit 200 .

The upper left dish decoration unit 270 includes a semi-cylindrical upper left dish decoration body 271 extending in the left and right direction and having translucency, an upper left dish reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left dish decoration body 271, A plate upper left decorative substrate 273 attached to the rear side of the plate upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is provided.

The upper left decorative body 271 of the dish extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper left ornamental body 271 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The plate upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

The upper left plate reflector 272 is inserted into the upper left plate decoration body 271 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the top left decorative body 271 of the plate can be decorated with light.

The left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper left plate decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the upper left plate decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate upper right decorative unit 275 includes a plate upper right decorative body 276 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right decorative body 276, A plate upper right decorative substrate 278 is attached to the rear side of the plate upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper right ornamental body 276 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending obliquely to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. This plate upper right decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

The plate top right reflector 277 is inserted into the plate top right decoration 276 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate top right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decoration substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decoration body 276 can be decorated with light emission.

The right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper right plate decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper right plate decoration substrate 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the upper right plate decoration 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5d-5. Plate lower left decorative unit and plate lower right decorative unit]
The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively. be done. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

The lower left plate decoration unit 280 includes a lower left plate decoration body 281 which is semicylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, a lower left plate reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left plate decoration body 281, A lower left plate decorative substrate 283 is attached to the rear side of the lower left plate reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape centered rearward in a plan view. is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The lower left plate decoration 281 is a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The shaft extends left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The left end of the plate lower left decoration 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The lower left ornamental body 281 of the plate has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. This plate lower left decorative body 281 is formed in milky white.

The lower left plate reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left plate decoration body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated with light emission.

The left end of the plate lower decoration unit 280 is positioned below the left end of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is located below the lower plate center decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. Contiguous with the left edge. Since the left end of the plate lower left decorative body 281 of the plate lower left decorative unit 280 is formed in a spherical shape, the left end looks as if it is hidden inside the door frame 3 . Since the lower left plate decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower left plate decoration 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the lower left plate decoration 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate lower right decoration unit 285 includes a plate lower right decoration body 286 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, and a plate lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a plate lower right decorative substrate 288 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The plate lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a rearward center in a plan view, It is attached to the lower portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The lower right plate decoration 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The dish lower right ornament 286 has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. This plate lower right decoration 286 is formed in milky white.

The plate lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the plate lower right decorative body 286 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower right decorative substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower right decoration body 286 can be decorated with light emission.

The right end of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is located below the right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is contiguous with the right edge of Since the right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is formed in a spherical shape, the right end appears to be hidden inside the door frame 3 . The lower right plate decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower right plate decoration body 286. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower right plate decoration substrate 288 are caused to emit light, the lower right plate decoration body 286 The entire front surface of the display can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, making it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as seen from the forward/backward direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 52(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. It is possible. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250. - 特許庁

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation part 301, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation part 303 is arranged in the ring. . The pressing operation part 303 is arranged at the center of the rotating operation part 302, and has a central pressing operation part 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotating operation part 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing portion 303b disposed between the inner peripheral portion and the inner peripheral portion.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation part 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation part 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 for transmitting rotation to and from the portion 302 , and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation portion base 320 .

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and a effect operation ring decoration board 352. A decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, a vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330. A performance operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Production control unit cover unit]
The effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation section cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top and rear.

The effect operation section cover unit 310 includes a downwardly recessed hemispherical unit lower cover 311, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, and a unit front cover. A plate center upper reflector 313 attached from behind in the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs attached to the plate center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. a plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a plate center lower reflector 315 attached from the rear in a plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, and a plate center lower reflector 315 attached to the plate center lower reflector 315 to direct light forward. and a plate center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape bulging downward on the front side from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the rear side thereof is placed on the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 from above. Mounted as placed. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in a slanted state so that the axis perpendicular to the imaginary plane formed on the upper edge extending in a semi-circular shape of the front portion is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 is formed with a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest portion when assembled to the dish unit 200. As shown in FIG.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 when viewed from above, and is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 . The unit front cover 312 includes a plate center upper decoration 312a in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semicircular shape, and a plate center upper decoration 312a that extends forward below the plate center upper decoration 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b is provided, the protruding semicircular arc extending in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. - 特許庁The unit front cover 312 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 at the lower end of the plate center lower decorative body 312b.

The upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder of approximately the same thickness (radius) into halves, and extend in a semicircular shape with the divided surfaces facing the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The lower plate center decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is slightly thinner than the upper plate center decoration 312a. is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the front end of the upper plate center decoration 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the lower plate center decoration 312b. When the plate unit 200 is assembled, the left and right ends of the upper plate center decoration 312a are continuous with the right ends of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the left ends of the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively, and the lower plate center decorations. The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is translucent and milky white.

Further, the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame The distance is about 1/2 of the full width of the base 101 in the horizontal direction.

The plate center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The plate center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The upper plate center decoration substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular shape along the upper plate center decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. A plurality of LEDs of the upper plate center decoration substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center upper decoration body 312a can be decorated with light.

The lower plate center reflector 315 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted into the lower plate center decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The plate center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking backward (inward). The lower plate center decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the lower plate center decoration body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. A plurality of LEDs of the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated with light.

The production operation section cover unit 310 does not have reinforcing ribs in the middle of the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semicircular shape. When the LEDs of the upper center decoration substrate 314 and the LEDs of the lower dish center decoration substrate 316 are caused to emit light, the whole of each can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and it is possible to make it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The performance operation part cover unit 310 has a front end projecting farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200.例文帳に追加In addition, in the production operation section cover unit 310, the upper plate center decoration 312a is continuous with the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is connected with the lower left plate decoration 281 and the right plate decoration. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286 . As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the integral decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation section base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation part base 320 is inserted into the effect operation part cover unit 310 from above, and the lower end is attached to the effect operation part cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 320 includes a body portion 321 that is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and has an open top, and a body portion 321 that extends outward from the upper end of the body portion 321 and has a circular outer periphery. a plurality of (here, four) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321; and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opens upward to support the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a rotatable manner.

The operation part base 320 is formed such that the main body part 321 is sized to accommodate the production operation button unit 360 therein. The main body part 321 has a bottom wall to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached from below, and a portion of the bottom surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be flat. The bottom wall of the main body part 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibrations from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibrations can be amplified, and the vibrations can be converted into sounds such as voice and music and output. can.

A leg portion 361 b of a button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 . Further, the body portion 321 has a through-hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the body portion 321 . The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the body part 321, and the operating part relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially coincides with the inner circumference of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . An effect operation ring decoration board 352 and a decoration board cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation section cover unit 310 .

The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the transmission gear for the operation ring so as to be rotatable about an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the driving side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is positioned at the flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation part base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the flange part 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the upper plate center decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . In addition, in the state where the effect operation unit 300 is assembled, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 321 in contact therewith.

[3-5e-3. Production control ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56 and the like. FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and FIG. 55(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. FIG. 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from above, and FIG. 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation part 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) approximately twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and an inner diameter approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the effect operation ring 330 has an outer diameter of approximately 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushings 333 are attached to the ring mounting base 331 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring mounting base 332, and are mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to prevent upward movement of the rotation base 332. and a regulating ring retaining member 334 .

In addition, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and attached to the ring outer upper cover 335 which constitutes a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side of the ring outer cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operation part 302 and form a part of the rotation operation part 302. and a ring inner cover 337 that is in the ring. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a translucent annular shape.

The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 and an inner diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the flange portion 322 . The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 and a boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 projecting upward from a plurality of (here, four) portions, and a space in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. and through-holes 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of sites. A plurality of through holes 331 c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 .

The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 . The rotation base 332 has a ring gear 332a projecting downward from the bottom surface and extending in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332 . The ring gear 332 a has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 , and faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331 when assembled to the effect operation ring 330 . The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring in a state assembled with the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on an outer upper surface portion 335a in which an arc forming the outer and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer upper surface portions 335a are arranged in the circumferential direction. and a plurality of outer cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending toward the center side and arranged in the circumferential direction. there is An outer upper surface portion 335a of the upper outer ring cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a quarter of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The upper outer cover mounting portion 335 c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the upper outer surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 .

The ring outer and lower cover 336 has an outer and lower surface portion 336a in which an arc forming the outer and lower portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and toward the center from the inner side of the outer and lower surface portion 336a. A plurality of outer and lower cover attachment portions 336b are provided. A lower outer surface portion 336a of the outer lower ring cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The lower outer cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the upper outer cover 335 of the ring.

The ring inner cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming the inside and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a parallel to the central axis. and a plurality of inner cover mounting portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. An inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The cylinder surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter equal to the inner diameter of the rotation base 332 . The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332. As shown in FIG.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a portion of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. - 特許庁

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57(a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front left. The rotary drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and for detecting the rotary operation of the rotary operation portion 302 . The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 .

The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft protrudes leftward. , a drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of an operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. 345, and a gear cover that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 to the rotary drive base and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. 346 and .

The rotation drive unit 340 also includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 that are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. and a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open leftward. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The driving gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates together with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. there is A second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with a gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 .

The transmission detection gear member 345 includes a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a left side surface of the gear portion 345a. and a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval at which they are separated in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345 b are detected by a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345 b of the transmission detection gear member 345 . The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction by an interval different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It's like As a result, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation portion 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345 .

When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the driving side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. engage with. In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 is entirely located inside the effect operation section cover unit 310 in a state where it is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 .

The rotation drive unit 340 is driven by an operation ring drive motor 342 to arbitrarily rotate the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via a drive gear 343, a transmission gear 344, a transmission detection gear member 345, and an operation ring transmission gear. can be rotated in the direction of In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 causes the drive gear 343 to repeat forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby reciprocatingly rotating and vibrating the rotary operation section 302. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, it is possible to change the contents of the player participation type presentation according to the direction of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 .

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation part 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotational direction of the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the rotation operation of the player can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation of the rotation operation section 302, it is possible to apply a load to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these elements, it is possible to provide the rotary operation unit 302 with an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player-participation type presentation or a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Operation ring transmission gear]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation portion base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 includes a bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the ring side gear portion 350a that rotates integrally with the ring side gear portion 350a to detect the transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur-gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the driving-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a narrows in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation portion base 320 so that its rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330 . The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by inserting it from above into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 and then attaching the gear mounting member 351 to the operation portion base 320 . be done.

When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged with the ring gear 332a. It meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340 . Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and can light-embellish the effect operation ring 330 (rotational operation unit 302) by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is formed in a shape in which a ring is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decoration board 352a on the front side and a rear decoration board 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decoration substrate 352a and the rear decoration substrate 352b. A plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is positioned below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300 . The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is covered with a transparent decoration board cover 353 on the upper side. The decoration board cover 353 is formed in a form divided into the front and rear sides, similarly to the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and covers the front decoration board 352a from above and is attached to the flange part 322 of the operation part base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b attached to the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 to cover the rear decoration substrate 352b from above.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, so that the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring mounting base 331 are passed through the ring outer side of the rotary operation unit 302. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be decorated with light from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to present the player with a light-emitting decoration such that an LED is provided in the rotary operation unit 302 .

[3-5e-7. vibration speaker]
Vibration speaker 354 in production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and is capable of outputting vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds such as voice and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Also, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation section base 320 . The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies compared to a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present more diverse effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit, viewed from above, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit, viewed from below. FIG. 62(a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation part 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the central pressing operation portion 303a. ing.

The performance operation button unit 360 is arranged symmetrically with respect to the button unit base 361 attached inside the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other. Upper base 363 , and between upper base 363 and button unit base 361 , are attached so as to be vertically movable by means of a pair of guide shafts 362 . and a pair of lifting springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted and biasing the lifting base 364 upward.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a cylindrical shape, the upper end of which is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. An operation button lifting drive motor 367 attached to protrude upward, a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 are engaged with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevation cam drive gear member rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably mounted through the central shaft 366. 370, an elevation cam member 371, which is connected to the elevation cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end and rotatably mounted through a central shaft 366, and rotates to raise and lower the elevation base 364; 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevation cam driving gear member 370 from above.

Furthermore, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom extending vertically with an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base, and is mounted above the elevation base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button body 373 and the lift base 364 and biasing the central button body 373 upward; A central button cover 375 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom and closed at the upper end side, and is attached to the upper end of the central button main body 373 so as to cover the upper side of the upper base 363 . and a central button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted, and a rise detection sensor 376a is attached to the bottom surface. In the effect operation button unit 360, a central button main body 373 and a central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the center button main body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364. An outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration substrate 377 and the outer periphery of the central button body 373; A translucent cylindrical perimeter decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the perimeter button decoration substrate 377 on the outer perimeter side and that is three-dimensionally decorated, and lifts up and down so as to cover the outer periphery and upper surface of the perimeter decorative lens 379. and a transparent outer perimeter button cover 380 attached to the base 364 and having a center button cover 375 facing upward at the center. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute the outer peripheral press operating portion 303b.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 includes a pressing detection sensor 381 attached to the button unit base 361 for detecting pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303, and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 attached to the button unit base 361. and a descent detection sensor 382 that detects the elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. A base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 . The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam driving gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to its upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and a descent detection sensor 382 attached to its lower surface. is attached. The button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 at the lower end of the leg portion 361b.

A pair of guide shafts 362 are mounted on the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and rearward from the center. A pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. A pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366 .

The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and have their lower ends in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and their upper ends in contact with the elevating base 364 . The lifting spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374 .

The elevating base 364 is formed to have substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, a central hole 364b having a size through which the elevating cam member 371 can pass, and a central hole 364b that penetrates vertically. A vertical wall portion 364c projecting upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. there is The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are mounted rotatably around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The lifting base 364 is restricted from moving upward by contacting the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c with the upper base 363, and a space is provided between the upper base 363 and the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 to move. forming. Also, the elevation base 364 is vertically moved by a pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevation cam member 371 .

The elevation cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevation cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. and a descent detection piece 370c which protrudes cylindrically downward from the bottom and is notched at two locations facing each other and which is detected by the descent detection sensor 382. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevation cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guides the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364. As shown in FIG.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis; a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (see Figure 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the distance between the adjacent cam portions 371a is smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364.

Further, the lift cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f that connects with the connecting portion 370b of the lift cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end.

The elevation cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. is formed as By rotating the elevation cam member 371, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 can be guided by the cam portion 371a so that the elevation base 364 can be elevated.

The central button main body 373 has a cylindrical cylindrical portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the cylindrical portion 373a, and a bottom portion 373b, and a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidable through the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c to be inserted, a central opening 373d passing through the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364, and a pressure detection sensor protruding downward from the bottom portion 373b. A push detection piece 373e detected by 381, a pair of guide bosses 373f projecting rearward from the bottom 373b in a columnar shape and inserted into the button spring 374, and a rise detection sensor 376a projecting upward from the bottom 373b and detected by the rise detection sensor 376a. and a rising detection piece 373g.

The center button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the lift base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. As shown in FIG. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373 .

The center button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that their lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and screws through which washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. A washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevation base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG.

The press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is activated when the bottom 373b (the lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 contacts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 to protrude downward. This center button main body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs with a weaker biasing force than the lifting spring 365 .

The rise detection piece 373g of the central button body 373 is designed to enter an opening provided in the upper base 363 when the bottom portion 373b (lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 contacts the lower surface of the upper base 363. is formed in

The center button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having approximately the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. The central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373 at the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b.

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top surface of the center button decoration board 376 are full-color LEDs. The center button decoration board 376 can light-embellish the center button cover 375 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the upper surface of the peripheral button decoration board 377 . The peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can light-embellish the peripheral decorative lens 379 and the peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. The center button decoration board 376 is arranged so that the rise detection sensor 376a is inserted into the opening provided in the upper base 363. As shown in FIG.

The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 includes an annular substrate portion 378 a that covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and is attached to the lift base 364 , and a cylindrical substrate portion 378 a that extends upward from the inner periphery of the substrate portion 378 a to cover the center button main body 373 . and a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The peripheral substrate cover 378 is transparent.

The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 has twisted portions extending upward so as to move in the circumferential direction and arranged in rows at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a of the peripheral substrate cover 378 . The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the lifting base 364 at the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

In the state where the effect operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. It is inserted into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevation cam member 371 from below. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Also, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, when assembled into the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 , and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 . also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63, etc.).

In this state (state shown in FIG. 62(a)), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pushed downward to move downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 is pushed downward. is detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is substantially level with the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65(c)).

In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. Neither is detected by the detection sensor 381 . That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation drive gear 368 counterclockwise in plan view, the elevation cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the elevation drive gear 368 . The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the elevation cam member 371 connected to the elevation cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevation cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. The cam 371b rolls to the left of the engaging portion 371c, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is moved upward along the second cam 371d by the biasing force of the lift spring 365. Together with this, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the elevated position, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the state of the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 abuts the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevation base 364 is restricted. In addition, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (the central depressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral depressing operation portion 303b) at the lowered position is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380 .

When the effect operation unit 300 is assembled into the effect operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65(b), etc.). reference).

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a ) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 are pressed against the button spring 374 . It moves downward against the force, and the center button main body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 . When the center button body 373 is in contact with the lift base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protrudes downward from the lift base 364. , the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

Also, in this state (the state of FIG. 62(b)), the rise detection piece 373g of the center button body 373 is detected by the rise detection sensor 376a, and it is detected that the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b is at the rise position.

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, After the center button main body 373 abuts on the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the lifting base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the lifting base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the lifting base 364, the peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing portion 303b) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364 and the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the lifting base 364 is detected. is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the central button cover 375 (the central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force greater than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the lifting base 364 moves through the outer peripheral button cover 380 to the lifting spring. It moves downward against the urging force of 365 , and the lower end of the lift base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 . In this state, the lift base 364 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in the lowered position. The pressure detecting piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lifting base 364, and the pressure detecting piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381.

In order to return the central button cover 375 and the peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation portion 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. 62(b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364, moves rightward (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the guide pin 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the elevation cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevation base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves toward the first cam. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the concave locking portion 371c by the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the state of the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operating section relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operating section base 320 . The operating section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body section 321 of the operating section base 320 and an operating section relay board 392 attached inside the board box 391 .

The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG. The operation part relay board 392 includes the plate center upper decoration board 314, the plate center lower decoration board 316, the operation ring drive motor 342, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevation drive motor 367, center button decoration board 376, outer peripheral button decoration board 377, press detection sensor 381, rise detection sensor 376a, and descent detection sensor 382, and plate unit relay board 214 of plate base unit 210 relaying the connection.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the action of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion. FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing portion of the pressing operation portion. It is a front view of a plate unit when an operation part is pressed.

The performance operation unit 300 has a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player on its upper surface. The effect operating section 301 is composed of a large annular rotating operating section 302 and a pressing operating section 303 arranged in the ring of the rotating operating section 302 . The press operation portion 303 includes a cylindrical central press operation portion 303 a positioned at the center of the rotary operation portion 302 and an annular outer peripheral press operation portion disposed between the central press operation portion 303 a and the rotary operation portion 302 . 303b.

The rotation operation part 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335 , a ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330 . The central pressing operation portion 303 a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360 , and the outer pressing operation portion 303 b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the imaginary plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotary operation part 302 (the effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion 303 arranged in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302 is inclined so that it moves backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). .

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 . Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 clockwise in a left side view, the effect operation ring 330 rotates through the operation ring transmission gear 350 . , rotates clockwise in plan view. On the other hand, when the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 counterclockwise in left side view, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates counterclockwise in plan view. .

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotary operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotary operation portion 302 is rotated clockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 rotates clockwise in left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and rotates. When the operating portion 302 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in left side view. This transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b with the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. FIG. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart in the circumferential direction, is greater than the space between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in rows at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , is an interval that is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, after the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected from the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

Since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected in this way, the content of the player participation type presentation can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 . Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring driving motor 342 rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. . Alternatively, the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the rotary operation portion 302 in the direction opposite to the direction of the rotary operation, thereby making the rotary operation heavy or giving a click feeling.

The rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation portion 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the drawing, the rotary operation unit 302 is attached with the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface exposed, so that it is formed in a shape that is easy for the player to grasp. .

As a result, the player can touch the rotary operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the player can rotate the rotary operation unit 302 in a way that is easy for the player to operate. is enhanced. Further, the rotary operation portion 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation portion 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. It should be noted that since the lower surface side of the rotary operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 below the effect operation ring 330, on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape. Thus, by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 to emit light, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, in the effect operation ring decoration board 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a line are successively arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 can be decorated with light. As a result, the player can be given the illusion that an LED (decoration board) is provided inside the rotary operation unit 302 that rotates.

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 has a pressing operation part 303 arranged in a ring of the rotary operation part 302, and the upper surface of the rotary operation part 302 is larger than the upper surface of the rotary operation part 302, as shown in FIG. 65(a). It is in a state of a lowered position projecting slightly upward. In this state, the rotary operation section 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation section 303a of the pressing operation section 303 can be pressed. When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward, the upper surface of the central push operation portion 303a (center button cover 375) descends to approximately the same height as the upper surface of the outer circumference push operation portion 303b (perimeter button cover 380), and the push is detected. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381 .

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing is detected. The pressure is never detected by the sensor 381 .

In a normal state, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the lifting base 364 to reach the raised position (see FIG. 65(b)). In this elevated position, the upper surface of the pressing operation portion 303 is positioned significantly higher than the upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302 . In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward to a greater extent than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 .

When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward while the push operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the central push operation portion 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central push operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b are at approximately the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b face the rotation operating portion 302. It will be in a state of approximately the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65(c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotary operating portion 302 (see FIG. 65(a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation portion 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed to the downward movement end, regardless of whether the pressing operation portion 303 is in the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to encourage the player to press the central pressing operation portion 303a firmly, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , the player-participation type performance can be more enjoyable.

Note that the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the pressing operation portion 303 may be used as a clue to facilitate the rotation operation, or the pressing operation portion 303 may hinder the rotation operation. Therefore, it is possible to change the operability of the rotary operation unit 302, thereby making it possible to enjoy a wider variety of operations.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. FIG. 66(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 66(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame left side unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative board 402 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the cage, a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402, and a door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 .

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens forward. The door frame left side decorative board 402 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative board 402a and a left side lower decorative board 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 402 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame left-side decoration substrate 402 can light-embellish the door-frame left-side decoration body 404 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 is formed with a through hole 403a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 . The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the left end of the upper left plate decoration body 271 of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is the top decoration body of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the left lower end of 453 .

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are approximately the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and looks as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. FIG. 69(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 69(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the back. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200, and a side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. and a plurality of luminous side window interior decorative portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and prevents a player playing with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 can be made difficult to see, and a player's personal space can be formed so as to protect the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface and cylindrically extending forward and arranged vertically in rows, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on a portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and a side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 are mounted. and internal reflectors 414 respectively inserted into the interiors of the side window trims 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to a right side reflector 415 that is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the door frame. A door having a through hole 416a that extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front and back direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed with a through hole 417a extending in a shape and penetrating in the left-right direction to constitute the side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side decorative substrate 418 attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the right side reflector 415. and a door frame right side decoration 419 attached to the right side reflector 415 .

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (three in this case) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller on the front end side than on the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416 at the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b. The side window inner decorative member 412 is attached to the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a lower position to an upper position with respect to the center in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed in translucent milky white.

The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 is attached to a portion behind the connection base 412 a of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 . A plurality of LEDs provided on the side window inner decorative portion decorative substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 has four LEDs arranged in a cross shape vertically and horizontally around the axial center of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at the rear portion of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. It is

The internal reflector 414 has an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four sections, upper, lower, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and has a wavy shape in the front-rear direction that moves forward and then backward from the top end to the bottom end. It is The right side reflector 415 is formed with a plurality of through holes 415a penetrating in the front-rear direction and through which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and frontward and rearward. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed opaque.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and frontward and rearward. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending deformed oval shape, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 418 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame right-side decorative substrate 418 can light-embellish the door-frame right-side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415 . As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decorative body 276 of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the right lower end of the body 453 .

The door frame right side unit 410, in a state assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. It looks embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) extending forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed like a screen. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be viewed through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (columnar) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending back and forth in the side window 410a. , the side window inner decorative portion 410b can be decorated with light. By luminous decoration of the side window interior decoration part 410b, the inside of the side window 410a can be brightened, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that illuminates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the edge of the island facility) through the three side window interior decoration parts 410b in 410a. Therefore, a player looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without moving to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities. This pachinko machine 1 can be used to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window inner decorative portion 410b can block the line of sight of a player located nearby. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if he is being watched by other players, so that the other players can play without hesitation. .

Furthermore, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are illuminated by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can dazzle the inside of the side window 410a, thereby changing the visibility through the side window 410a. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, the light is emitted in a belt-like and radial manner, so that the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzling and the opposite side is seen from between them. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as a neighbor to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for other players to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to being unable to concentrate on the game and feeling lost due to mistakes being induced, and making the player concentrate on the game to make the game more enjoyable. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72(a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear, and (c) is a top lower cover removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the folded state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from above, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from below. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covering the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. a top upper cover 452 attached to a door frame top base 451, a door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top base 451. and a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top center decoration board 455 attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top decoration board 455. a door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 in front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front; a door frame top right decoration board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top central reflector 458 arranged between a door frame top decoration 453 and a door frame top central decoration substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457. and a top right reflector 460 located in and attached to the front of the top upper cover 452 .

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a center speaker box 461 attached to the center of the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top center speakers 462 attached downward to the center speaker box 461, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. a top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454; a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below; A door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper side of the door frame top base 451. there is

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like body portion 451a extending in the left and right direction with the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction. and a forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side of the body portion 451a is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right forward protruding portions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open rearward. The forward projecting portion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top cover 452 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 when viewed from the front. The top upper cover 452 covers the outer sides of the left and right forward protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is shaped to connect the upper front ends of the left and right forward protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes forward most at the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. The top cover 452 also has an opening 452a on the upper surface thereof, which is largely cut forward from the rear end. This opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468 .

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a semi-circular arc that protrudes forward, and the curvature decreases as it goes from both left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and it extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452 . formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The door frame top decoration 453 faces downward at both ends in the horizontal direction, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively.

The door-frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door-frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door-frame top base 451, and bulges upward at the center in the left-right direction. , extending in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is spaced apart in the left-right direction. It has a pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating up and down on the lateral outside of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speakers 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454 .

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top center decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decoration substrate 455 can light-embellish the central portion of the door frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate the left portion of the door-frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. This door-frame top right decoration substrate 457 can light-embellish the right portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

Top center reflector 458 , top left reflector 459 , and top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, on door frame top center decoration substrate 455 , door frame top left decoration substrate 456 , and door frame top right decoration substrate 457 . Through-holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the respective mounted LEDs.

The center speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top center speakers 462 face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. As shown in FIG. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker that outputs sounds such as speech and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right forward projections 451 b of the door frame top base 451 . The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter, and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Sounds output from the top central speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465 .

The door frame top relay board 467 includes the door frame top center decorative board 455 , the door frame top left decorative board 456 , the door frame top right decorative board 457 , the top center speaker 462 , the top side speaker 464 , and the door frame base unit 100 . It is for relaying the connection with the door frame secondary relay board 105 .

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452 , has a front end locked to the top upper cover 452 , and has a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. - 特許庁In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively, forming an integral decoration. there is In addition, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player through a pair of top central speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464 .

[3-9. door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. The door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire periphery of the door window 101a.

A plate upper left decorative body 271, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate central upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, the upper left plate decoration 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the upper right plate decoration 276, the upper center plate decoration 312a, the left side door frame decoration 404, the right side door frame decoration 419, and the Behind the door frame top decoration 453 are a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, and a door frame top center decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately lighting the LEDs of these decoration substrates, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated, A player can be shown or given a light emitting effect such that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, on the upper surface, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation part 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotary operation part 302. A pressing operation portion 303 consisting of a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and a cylindrical central pressing portion 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotating operation portion 302 is provided below the rotating operating portion 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or half-tube) large-diameter plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b are mounted vertically apart from each other. A door-frame left-side decoration 404 of the door-frame left-side unit 400 and a door-frame right-side decoration of the door-frame right-side unit 410 have similar shapes so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached outside the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b. Since the pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be made conspicuous.

In addition, the upper left plate decoration 271, the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower left plate decoration 281, the lower right plate decoration 286, and the lower center plate decoration 312b, which are arranged below the upper plate center decoration 312a, are placed in half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 increases upward from the lower end, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that is arranged on the upper side and can be operated by the player. The push operation part 303 can be made to look larger, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation part 302 and the push operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can.

Further, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, a doughnut-shaped rotary operation part 302 is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends forward as it goes upward. Since the state is tilted to be lowered, the top surfaces of the rotation operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 face the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be fully visible, and the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear larger. In addition, as described above, since the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotary operation portion 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that the player can immediately rotate when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 allows the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, the diameter of the rotary operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center decoration body 312a and the lower plate center decoration body 312b are made larger than the diameter of the rotation operation part 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation portion 302, the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b protrude farther forward than the upper plate 201. Since the decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appeal to the player can be made. can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the body frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. Fig. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted possible.

The body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a body frame top hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame top hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame top hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; A main body frame hinge assembly attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in front view, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid 520 is provided.

The main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and is positioned within the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for hitting a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base unit 500 in front view, and the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out game balls B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. a rear cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable; and a locking unit 650 for locking between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a box-shaped ball tank attached to the payout base 551 extending left and right and opening upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 and extending leftward in an upwardly open groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 according to instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the board unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the body frame base 501 , a plurality of door frame hooks 652 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3 , and a unit base 651 protruding rearward. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be engaged with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that vertically moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653, and the door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It has a lock spring 655 that biases the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 501 attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503 . and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 includes a base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, which forms the lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b. A placing portion 501c and a game board restricting portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

In addition, the body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board placing portion 501c in the front view of the base body 501a in front view, and has a launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540, and a launcher attachment portion 501e. A cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted is inserted in the right side of the portion 501e when viewed from the front. A circular speaker opening 501g that faces the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. It has a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h in front view.

Further, the body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base body 501a when viewed from the front. A rotatably attached rearwardly extending portion 501j is formed on the rear surface of the base body 501a near the upper and lower ends of the left end in the front view, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 around a longitudinally extending axis below the game board placing portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 enables the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be detachable by regulating forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position to the right of the speaker opening 501g and below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable mounting recess 501h is sized to accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a projecting forward and extending rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of protruding strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a guide body 502a are penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that an attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503 . The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the opposite end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame sub board. It is connected to the relay board 105 .

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the body frame base 501 at an end (right end) on the side opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the hinge in the left-right direction. ) is mounted rotatably around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3 .

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502 is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and in a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are installed. (see FIG. 84(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 .

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably, α/3≧β). (see FIG. 84(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but the increase stops when the opening angle α exceeds a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). transition as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501 . By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not caught between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. problems can be prevented.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can get used to it. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the fold. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease of the door frame 3 can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a guides the leading end of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis) side of the lower door frame hinge pin 126 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the center axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and the door is positioned closer to the speaker duct 103 than the cable holder 103a. The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open through the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and effects similar to those described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
Main body frame upper hinge member 510 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. is rotatably mounted on the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the above.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent downward into an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511. and a main body frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame hinge assembly 50 . The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a which penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion and supports the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 pivotally. I have.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501 k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 . The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 .

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to attach the main body frame 4 to the door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member upward into an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 spaced upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

The lower hinge second body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. a hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3; , is equipped with The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 . can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcing frame]
Main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500 . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded profile.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a rear portion extending rightward from the front end thereof, which restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also extends from the left side of the main body frame 4 through between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( Prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and FIG. 85(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. The ball shooting device 540 is attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and shoots the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 onto the game board attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for hitting into the game area 5a. The ball shooting device 540 can hit the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 .

The ball launching device 540 includes a flat plate-shaped launching base 541 attached to the launching device attachment portion 501e of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through a firing base 541; A shooting rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the shooting base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 . Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the shooting rail 544 and hit into the game area 5a.

It should be noted that if the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball B, etc., the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the gap, the ball drops into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[4-6. payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a front perspective view of the payout base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout base unit. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500 .

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 . The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a front-rear width extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a; and a rear side of the top plate portion 551a. and a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a rear plate portion 551b extending from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width to the right. A back plate left portion 551e, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and rightward from the front portion of the lower side of the left side plate portion 551b. A bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f are provided. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the horizontal direction with a length substantially equal to the horizontal width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b extending above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with a length substantially equal to the height of the direction. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of a top plate portion 551a, a left side plate portion 551b, and a right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the dispensing base 551 has a vertically extending shallow concave portion opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the left side portion 551e of the back plate, and the inner side plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is attached. In addition, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward from the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and includes a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is open upward, and a part that extends left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape that is open upward.

In addition, the dispensing base unit 550 includes a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and a first rail cover 554 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stop member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 has a length in the left-right direction that is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the shape extends straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560 .

In addition, the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side is lower at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stop member 557 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are provided to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the end on the first rail cover 554 side is arranged around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By delaying the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B that are circulating in two stages, the rectification pieces 556a rectify the flow of the game balls B so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side. Even if the height is lowered, the balls will not be clogged.

The ball stop member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in a front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Furthermore, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 in front view on the top surface of the portion extending left and right of the payout base 551 . The external terminal plate 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 has a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501 . A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. FIG. 87(a) is a front perspective view of the payout unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. FIG. 88(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550. As shown in FIG.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and an upper full ball path unit A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580 . The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pull out lever 593 is operated from the ball pull out passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit A game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides down the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball withdrawal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the side of the door frame 3 via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. ball guidance unit]
The ball guide unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for

The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a meandering manner through which the game ball B flows, and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward, and the front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. A flat guide passage front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by a game ball B flowing through the guide passage 570a, and a game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

In the sphere guide unit 570, the shape of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 when viewed from the front is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide the guide unit base 571. The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while being repeatedly folded between the widths of the unit base 571 in the horizontal direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571 .

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the circulation direction in which the game ball B is circulated. It can be guided in a line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top thereof so as to be able to move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. Specifically, the upper portion of the movable piece member 573 is attached to the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in a front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. is formed to This movable piece member 573 is in a state where the game ball B abuts on the part protruding into the guide passage 570a, and the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-off detection sensor 574 is in a state of detection when the game ball B exists in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B does not exist in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guide unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guide unit 570, and many games are played in the guide passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball end detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a back cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a opened rearward and through which the game balls B can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a; A flat dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward are provided. ing.

Dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between dispensing device main body 581 and dispensing device front lid 583. A spur-gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached thereto, and a spur-gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 , a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispenser main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and the second transmission gear 587 meshes with the second transmission gear 587. and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. a payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a rotating integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and protruding into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 is provided.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a. A movable ball removal piece 592 attached to a portion branched from the dispensing passage 580a by a lid 582 so as to be able to open and close the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. and a ball extracting lever 593 attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically in a plan view. Dispensing device 580 has a width in the left-right direction larger than the width in the left-right direction of ball guiding unit 570 toward the right in front view.

As shown in FIG. 89, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It is open downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the top to about 1/3 of the total height so as to move leftward little by little as it goes downward from the upstream end, and after bending slightly obliquely downward to the right from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically toward the center (rotational axis) of the delivery blade 589 . Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer circumference of the payout blade 589 is formed, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the dispensing blade 589 in the rear view.

A payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout vane 589 and directly above the downstream end in the payout passage 580a.

The ball extraction passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches at a portion where it is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b diverge. The body-side guide wall 581a protrudes rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b in a rear view. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a branch from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removing movable piece 592 rotates through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end when viewed from the rear. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the dispensing device front lid 583. The dispensing gear member 588 is provided with three outwardly extending flat detection pieces 588b at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 . The delivery blade 589 is provided with three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The wing piece 589a extends from above in the payout passage 580a toward the rotating shaft and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Further, it protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 has a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotates clockwise in the rear view. Thus, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved downstream.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially attached to the payout device rear cover 582 and the payout device front cover 583 so as to be rotatable together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotating shaft of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the delivery blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 that rotates together with the delivery blade 589 .

The upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592 is rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball removing movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball extraction movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 and to the left in the rear view. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extracting lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part thereof can come into contact with the ball extracting movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extracting movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the upper end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (Fig. 90).

When the ball extraction lever 593 is lifted to make the ball extraction movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which was in a state like a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592, moves to the ball extraction movable piece 592. and flows down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a side. will flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the game ball B vigorously, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of this contact. It is not caught between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the ball extraction movement due to the collision of the game ball B can be prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 .

For this reason, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b, so that pachinko It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Also, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball extraction passage 580b. , the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the gap is larger than the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the narrow gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball after that is released. Since the movement of the movable ball removal piece 592 is due to inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removal piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball removal piece 592, and the main body side guide. The game ball B does not fly out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be surely circulated to the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank ball route unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550 . The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610 . The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full-tank base 601 and has an open front side. and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and has a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

In addition, the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper delivery ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in a front view and opening downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper full discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the bottom surface, and an upper opening near the right end in the front view on the top surface and substantially perpendicular to the bottom. and an upper ball extraction passage 600e extending downward and opening downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side in front view, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are arranged in order and open downward. When the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper disbursed ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600 e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580 b in the dispensing device 580 . As a result, the game ball B released (discharged) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. is emitted downward from any of the Also, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600 . The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c. 611, a lower full-tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full-tank base 611, a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full-tank base 611 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth, and A payout passage opening/closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full-tank payout passage 610b and a payout passage opening/closing door 613 are attached in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full-tank payout passage 610b. and a biasing closing spring 614 .

The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full-tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. As shown in FIG. The lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b extends forward while being slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full-tank dispensing passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage open/close door 613 is rotatably mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. The payout passage open/close door 613 is biased clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the center of rotation of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface of the actuating protrusion 613a approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed to contact the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4. As shown in FIG.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full payout passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are connected to the upper full ball passage. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d passes through the lower full payout passage 610b. , and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4), the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 is such that the actuating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 contacts the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As shown in FIG. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are open, and are in communication with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 in the state assembled to the body frame 4 . In a normal state, the ball extraction lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is positioned at the lower end, closing the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a at the branched portion. Further, in the lower full-tank ball path unit 610, the dispensing passage open/close door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are supplied from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the ball-out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580.例文帳に追加When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout vane 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout vane 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570 a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573 , and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573 . As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589 .

In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b moves clockwise in the back view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a 589 is discharged downstream. After being detected by the payout detection sensor 591, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (ball housing portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The game balls B sent to the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state and are arranged directly under the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. , is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 at .

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device. The game ball B paid out from 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B. As the game ball B starts to stay, the game ball B starts to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full ball payout passage 600d passes through the lower full ball payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving opening 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be received. After that, the game ball B received by the full ball socket 150b is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are put out, the game balls B can be automatically put out to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

In addition, when the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B cannot be released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower tray The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( The player is notified that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the state of the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

At this time, at the position of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the falling game ball B contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592, so that the ball extraction movable piece 592 is less likely to break.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through and discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93(a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and FIG. 93(b) is a back perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 .

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, and a speaker cover 621 facing forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. and a container-like speaker box 623 that is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and that opens forward. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of vertically extending slits penetrating in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction, obliquely downward and rearward. and an open connecting portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side so as to face forward. The connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low sounds.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward. is formed so that the protrusion of the As a result, a sufficient space can be secured on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, so that the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620 a forms part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 . In the enclosure 624, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front. Even if it is formed stepwise so as to reduce the volume, a sufficiently wide space is ensured on the right side of the body frame speaker 622 .

When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connection cylinder part 43a so that the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the body frame speaker 622 is positioned behind the speaker unit 620a. and the inner space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication. Therefore, on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43 can form a wide enclosure 624. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42. As shown in FIG.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body-frame speaker 622 (part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right in a front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the lower outer frame assembly 40 side is communicated through the connecting tube portion 43a, the lower outer frame assembly 40 can be connected to the lower outer frame assembly 40 without particularly attenuating the low frequency range in the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel member 42 .

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622, and the sound is output from the plate unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a loud sound with deep bass.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are produced. This allows the player to listen to sound with rich bass.

In the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through-cylinder 623a extending in a tubular shape communicating with the through-hole 621d and penetrating back and forth is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. and a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a front view. A ball ejection guide portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharged ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guide portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball ejection port 629 for ejecting downward the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens leftward on the upper left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end that opens to the left end side of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 . The ball removal guide part 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a state where it is assembled to the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving portion 628. - 特許庁

The ejected ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends laterally. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 at the left end in front view, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view after guiding the ball ejection guide part 627 and the ejected ball receiving part 628. Since the liquid is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wide space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and .

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (Fig. 97) and The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 and payout commands from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Then, the instructed number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, thereby increasing the deterrence against fraud.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a rear side of the interface substrate 635. and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 .

The circuit board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward to the rear of the body-frame speaker 622 . The interface board 635 is connected to one end (body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 . The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board, the peripheral control board, etc., and is connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends rightward in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 . The back cover 640 has its right side in a front view attached to the rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically. and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600. As shown in FIG.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front. It is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

[4-10. locking unit]
Locking unit 650 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98(a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and FIG. 98(b) is a back perspective view of the locking unit. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 .

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lock units protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 protruding backward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and a door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the direction of rotation. and a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the body frame 4 , a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 , transmission cylinders 654 , and outer frame unlocking levers 656 are positioned forward of the front surface of the body frame base 501 . Protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engaged with the transmission member 133, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are engaged with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the door frame hooks 652 are locked. The frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in a front view. The door frame hook 652 moves upward and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the body frame 4 . On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654 to unlock the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 , sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 to move downward. 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the front end sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are moved by the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, it is locked by the biasing force of the lock spring 655. As shown in FIG.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. FIG. 99 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 100 is a front view showing a game area in which game balls circulate on the game board. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by the player's operation of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 . In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning opening 2001, a first start opening 2002, a gate portion, and a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 (see FIG. 100). Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening in the game area 5a. It is for performing a game in which the driving operation of the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a are enjoyed so as to be received or passed through the opening 2006 or the like.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 is provided. A plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 100). In addition, the game board 5 includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is performed by hitting game balls B into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 97 and 117, etc.) for controlling contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit (not shown) arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100. A front unit 2000 attached to the front surface and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-shaped panel holder (not shown) attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the game areas. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the 5a, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, A second starting port 2004 that enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A first big prize winning port 2005 and a second big prize winning port 2006 in which the game ball B can be accepted either according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B, It has

In addition, the table unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. , a side unit 2200 having two general winning openings 2001 attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the front view, and a vertical center at the right end in the front view in the game area 5a A gate unit 2300 having a gate part 2003 attached to the lower part of the game area 5a, and one general prize winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a first big prize opening 2005 and a second big prize opening 2006 is provided.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (panel holder) and has a box shape with an open front, and a square opening that is closed by detachably attaching the performance display device 1600 to the rear wall from the rear side. and a lower movable production unit 3100, an upper rear movable production unit 3200, and an upper front movable production unit 3300 attached in the back box (not shown).

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in a front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact part 1006 which connects the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and contacts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 is provided.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Furthermore, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 1008 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 passes through the out port 1008 and is discharged to the rear of the front constituent member 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 projects backward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1010 is aligned with the notch of a panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder (not shown) attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum required thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that In addition, in this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a and corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front structural member 1000 . Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front and rear directions for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

The panel holder of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder detachably holds the panel plate 1110, is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and has a through-hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has the same size as the game area 5a. ing.

Further, the panel holder has a notch portion that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion is formed to match the notch portion 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion are penetrated and the lower full ball path is formed. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is slanted downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the state assembled to the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 , the ejecting portion 1201 is located directly above the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620 of the body frame 4 . As a result, all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. The ball can be discharged from the discharge part 1201 formed in the lower part to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 117) for controlling game content, payout of game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. and has.

The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be traced. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2301, a second starting opening sensor 2511, a first large winning opening sensor 2512, a second large winning opening sensor 2513, a starting opening solenoid 2514, and a first attacker solenoid 2515. , the second attacker solenoid 2516, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the gaming status, and two indicators for displaying the result of a normal lottery that is drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003. A normal symbol display made up of LEDs and a normal reservation display made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the passage of the game ball B through the gate portion 2003 are provided.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special pattern indicator consisting of eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. ing.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 displays the number of repetitions of the opening/closing pattern of at least one of the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 ( A round indicator consisting of five LEDs displaying the number of rounds).

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit is attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box (not shown) that houses the peripheral control board 1510. , is equipped with The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, and the like, and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box of the back unit 3000. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box at the approximate center. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

[5-8. front unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end partially covers the opening of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game ball B struck into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first starting port 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate part 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , to the second starting port 2004 that allows the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A first big prize winning port 2005 and a second big prize winning port 2006 that allow acceptance of the game ball B in at least one of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B. , is equipped with

A plurality of (here, four) general winning holes 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one is arranged on the right side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowest end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. Right under the gate section 2003, the right general prize winning opening 2001 is arranged. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at a height slightly lower than the general prize winning opening 2001 on the right side in the lower left of the gate portion 2003 . The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged below the second starting opening 2004 at a height slightly lower than the first starting opening 2002 . The second big prize winning opening 2006 is located to the left of the first big winning opening 2005 and slightly lower.

The front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1008 in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has one general prize winning port 2001 and a first start port 2002. A start port unit 2100 and a start port A side unit 2200 having two general winning openings 2001 attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the unit 2100 in front view, and a side unit 2200 at the right end in front view in the game area 5a with respect to the center in the vertical direction A gate unit 2300 attached to the bottom and having a gate part 2003, and one general prize winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a gate unit 2300 attached to the center of the front view in the game area 5a. A frame-shaped center role 2500 having a first big prize opening 2005 and a second big prize opening 2006, and a transparent presentation unit 2600 attached so as to close the frame of the center role 2500. and have.

The gate unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is arranged at the right end in the front view in the game area 5a and is located below the center in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 . The gate unit 2300 includes a gate portion 2003 formed so that the game balls B can always pass through in the vertical direction one by one, and a gate sensor 2301 that detects the game balls B that have passed through the gate portion 2003 .

In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then sent to the substrate holder 1200 below. Ejected. In addition, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the first starting port sensor 3002, and discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. be done.

Also, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2511 and discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. The game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2512 or the second big winning hole sensor 2513, and then moves to the rear side of the game panel 1100. It is sent and ejected to the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8a. Center role]
The center role item 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. FIG. 101 is a front view of the center accessory and the display effect unit in the front unit of the game board. The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. FIG. The center accessory 2500 is formed in the shape of a frame, and the effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 through the frame, the lower movable effect unit 3100 provided in the back unit 3000, and the upper front movable effect unit. 3300 etc. can be visually recognized from the front. The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, except for the lower side, so that the game ball B hit into the game area 5a is positioned inside the frame. to prevent intrusion into

The center accessory 2500 includes one general prize winning opening 2001 arranged at the lower right corner of the outer circumference of the frame when viewed from the front, a second starting opening 2004 arranged slightly below and to the left of the general winning opening 2001, and a second starting opening 2004. It has a first big winning hole 2005 arranged below the second starting hole 2004 and a second big winning hole 2006 arranged to the left and slightly below the first big winning hole 2005 . In addition, the center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 which is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 can be released. A warp exit 2502 opened in the frame and a stage 2503 capable of rolling the game ball B discharged from the warp exit 2502 in the horizontal direction and then discharging it into the game area 5a are provided.

The stage 2503 of the center role 2500 has a curved shape with the central side in the left-right direction depressed, and is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the starter unit 2100. 1110), the center position in the left-right direction is the lowest. This stage 2503 is inclined such that the lowest portion in the center in the left-right direction is lowered forward, and the game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from this portion. The height of the lowest portion of the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 is approximately the same height as the second starting port 2004 .

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5 , the elevated part (top) in the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is located directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 . As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it will be received by the first starting port 2002 with a very high probability.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 includes a second starting opening sensor 2511 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004, and a first large winning opening sensor 2511 that detects the game ball B received in the first big winning opening 2005. A winning hole sensor 2512 and a second big winning hole sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2006 are provided (see FIG. 117). In addition, the center accessory 2500 includes a starting opening solenoid 2514 for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004 according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening. A first attacker solenoid 2515 for opening and closing the first big winning opening 2005 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the opening 2004, the first starting opening 2002 or the second A second attacker solenoid 2516 for opening and closing the second big winning opening 2006 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 is provided.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper right side of the center in the left-right direction and the upper part of the right side face in a front view are aligned with the outer periphery (the outer rail 1001 and the right rail 1005) of the game area 5a. A gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between them. In addition, when the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006 are arranged in the lower right corner of the front view. The lower right corner portion in front view extends to the lower right corner in the game area 5a, forming a space between the lower right corner portion and the upper portion of the right side surface. A gate unit 2300 is arranged in the space.

Therefore, when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), the game ball B can pass through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability. At the same time, the game ball B can be accepted into the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 which are opened (opened) with a high probability.

[5-8b. display unit]
The display presentation unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105 and the like. FIG. 102 is a side cross-sectional view of the display effect unit along with the center accessory cut at the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LEDs in the display effect unit and the reflective concave portions of the front light guide plate. FIG. 104 is a front view showing the light emission mode of the front light guide plate. FIG. 105 is a front view of the game board shown with the front light guide plate of the display effect unit illuminated.

A display effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 so as to close the frame of the center accessory 2500 . The display effect unit 2600 includes a transparent flat front light guide plate 2610 that closes the frame of the center accessory 2500, a reflector 2620 attached to the upper side of the front light guide plate 2610, and an upper surface of the reflector 2620. A front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 mounted with a plurality of LEDs 2630 for irradiating light toward the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610, and a center accessory covering the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 and the reflector 2620 from the front. a front cover 2650 attached to 2500;

The front light guide plate 2610 of the display effect unit 2600 includes a transparent plate-shaped light guide plate main body 2611 and a plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 formed on the back surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. It has a plurality of fine reflecting recesses 2613 that reflect incident light forward. The plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610 are composed of four specific light entrance portions 2612a, 2612b, 3rd specific light entrance portions 2612c, and 4th specific light entrance portions 2612d. It is configured. The first specific light entering portion 2612a, the second specific light entering portion 2612b, the third specific light entering portion 2612c, and the fourth specific light entering portion 2612d divide the upper surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 into eight equal parts in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction). Then, they are arranged in order from left to right in two circles (the fourth specific light entrance portion 2612d is followed by the first specific light entrance portion 2612a).

The reflecting concave portion 2613 has a plane extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light entering portion 2612 and inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 . . The reflective recess 2613 is recessed into a pent roof-like triangle. The reflective concave portions 2613 can reflect light incident from the corresponding specific light incident portions 2612 in a direction substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 . In addition, the reflecting recesses 2613 can reflect the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light entrance portions 2612 in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 .

As a result, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 103, when light is incident from the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2612, it is reflected by the reflective concave portion 2613 toward the front of the light guide plate main body 2611 (perpendicular to the plane of the paper). A player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 sees the reflecting concave portion 2613 to emit light. On the other hand, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 103, when light is incident from a specific light entrance portion 2612 that does not correspond, it is reflected by the reflective concave portion 2613 in a direction other than the front front of the light guide plate main body 2611, A player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 does not see that the reflecting concave portion 2613 emits light.

In this embodiment, the reflective concave portion 2613 is in a triangular concave state and extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612. However, this is not the case. , and it is sufficient if it extends in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2612 .

The plurality of reflecting recesses 2613 correspond to any one of the plurality of specific light entering portions 2612, and the plurality of first reflecting recesses 2613a and second specific light entering portion 2612b corresponding to the first specific light entering portion 2612a. a plurality of second reflecting recesses 2613b corresponding to the plurality of third reflecting recesses 2613c corresponding to the third specific light entering portion 2612c; a plurality of fourth reflecting recesses corresponding to the fourth specific light entering portion 2612d The recess 2613d, and the like.

In addition, the front light guide plate 2610 has a plurality of patterns 2614 that can be displayed in different manners by reflecting light forward from a specific group of the reflecting recesses 2613 among the plurality of reflecting recesses 2613 . there is The plurality of patterns 2614 includes a first pattern 2614a consisting only of a plurality of first reflective concave portions 2613a, a second pattern 2614b consisting only of a plurality of second reflective concave portions 2613b, and a third pattern 2614b consisting only of a plurality of third reflective concave portions 2613c. It is composed of a pattern 2614c and a fourth pattern 2614d consisting of only a plurality of fourth reflecting concave portions 2613d.

The first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are concentric, as shown in FIGS. are arranged in such an order as to return to the beginning and become the first pattern 2614a).

Reflector 2620 has fixed recess 2621 into which the upper end of front light guide plate 2610 is inserted. By inserting the front light guide plate 2610 into the fixed concave portion 2621, the reflector 2620 can sandwich the front side and back side of the front light guide plate 2610, and the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned without play. can. Through holes 2622 penetrating vertically are formed in the bottom surface (upper surface) of the fixed recess 2621 at portions corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 2630 mounted on the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 .

The front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 has a strip-like shape extending left and right, and a plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted at a portion directly above the fixed concave portion 2621 of the reflector 2620 on the lower surface. The plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted (attached) to portions corresponding to the plurality of through holes 2622 of the reflector 2620, respectively. The front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is attached to the upper surface of the reflector 2620 so that the plurality of LEDs 2630 are formed to face downward through the through holes 2622 .

A plurality of LEDs 2630 are attached so as to correspond to a plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610 . The plurality of LEDs 2630 includes a first LED group 2630a corresponding to the first specific light entrance portion 2612a, a second LED group 2630b corresponding to the second specific light entrance portion 2612b, and a third specific light entrance portion 2612c. and a fourth LED group 2630d corresponding to the fourth specific light entrance portion 2612d. The first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d divide the plurality of LEDs 2630 arranged in the left-right direction into eight equal parts in the left-right direction. (The fourth LED group 2630d is followed by the first LED group 2630a). In this embodiment, the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d each have six LEDs 2630 .

Next, the lighting effect by the display effect unit 2600 of this embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2630a of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, the light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the first specific light incident portion 2612a, is reflected to the front by the first reflecting concave portion 2613a, and is reflected from the remaining second LEDs. Since the second reflecting recess 2613b, the third reflecting recess 2613c, and the fourth reflecting recess 2613d reflect to other than the front, only the first reflecting recess 2613a can be seen to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. A first pattern 2614a composed of a plurality of first reflecting concave portions 2613a can be caused to emit light (see FIG. 104(a)).

When the second LED group 2630b of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the second specific light entrance portion 2612b, is reflected forward by the second reflecting recess portion 2613b, and is reflected from the remaining second LED group 2630b. Since the first reflecting recess 2613a, the third reflecting recess 2613c, and the fourth reflecting recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the second reflecting recess 2613b appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. A second pattern 2614b composed of a plurality of second reflecting concave portions 2613b can be caused to emit light (see FIG. 104(b)).

When the third LED group 2630c of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the third specific light incident portion 2612c, is reflected forward by the third reflecting concave portion 2613c, and is reflected from the remaining third LED group 2630c. Since the first reflecting recess 2613a, the second reflecting recess 2613b, and the fourth reflecting recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the third reflecting recess 2613c can be seen shining from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. A third pattern 2614c composed of a plurality of third reflecting concave portions 2613c can be caused to emit light (see FIG. 104(c)).

When the fourth LED group 2630d of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, the light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the fourth specific light entrance portion 2612d, is reflected to the front by the fourth reflecting recess portion 2613d, and the remaining Since the first reflecting recess 2613a, the second reflecting recess 2613b, and the third reflecting recess 2613c are reflected to other than the front, only the fourth reflecting recess 2613d appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. A fourth pattern 2614d composed of a plurality of fourth reflecting concave portions 2613d can be caused to emit light (see FIG. 104(d)).

As described above, since the plurality of patterns 2614 arranged concentrically can be made to emit light, the plurality of LEDs 2630 are arranged in a first LED group 2630a, a second LED group 2630b, a third LED group 2630c, and a fourth LED group 2630c. When the LED group 2630d is illuminated in order, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d can be illuminated in order, and there is a movement that spreads outward from the center. It is possible to perform a lighting effect like an animation.

On the other hand, when the plurality of LEDs 2630 are caused to emit light in the order of the fourth LED group 2630d, the third LED group 2630c, the second LED group 2630b, and the first LED group 2630a, the fourth pattern 2614d, the third pattern 2614c, the second The pattern 2614b and the first pattern 2614a can be illuminated in order, and a lighting effect such as an animation with a movement that concentrates from the outside toward the center can be performed.

As described above, according to the display effect unit 2600, a single front light guide plate 2610 can emit a plurality of (three or more) different patterns 2614, so that each pattern can be displayed for animation display or the like. There is no need to provide a plurality of light guide plates, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. In addition, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close to the player side as possible, and a wide space is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610. can be easily secured. Therefore, since a large space can be secured behind the front light guide plate 2610, the lower movable production unit 3100, the upper rear movable production unit 3200, the upper front movable production unit 3300, etc. can be arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610. can be arranged, thereby improving the appearance in the game area 5a and making it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the players, and in addition to the performance by the light emitting display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable performance By performing movable performances by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable performance unit 3200, the upper front movable performance unit 3300, etc., various performances can be provided to the players, and the players are entertained and their interest is suppressed. be able to.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 105, the surface light guide plate 2610 makes a plurality of translucent patterns 2614 appear in front of the effect unit, the decorative body, and the effect display device 1600 by the point-like light emission of the plurality of reflecting recesses 2613. Since it is possible to show moving light emitting decorations like animation, it is possible to give a strong impact to players who are accustomed to light emitting effects using a conventional light guide plate, and to surprise and amuse the players. It is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, raise the player's sense of expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since only the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the luminous display of the picture 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610, the picture 2614 cannot be viewed by other players far from the front. To prevent other players from paying attention by making it difficult to see the light emission display and making it difficult for other players to notice that the performance using the front light guide plate 2610 is being performed. At the same time, the player can play the game without worrying about other players, enjoy the game, and suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached so as to be sandwiched between the fixing recesses 2621 of the reflector 2620, the plurality of LEDs 2630 attached to the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 can be reliably positioned with respect to the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610. can do. Thereby, each LED 2630 (first LED group 2630a, second LED group 2630b, third LED group 2630c, fourth LED group 2630d) is arranged at a position corresponding to each specific light entrance portion 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light from each LED 2630 can be reflected forward by the corresponding reflecting concave portion 2613, and the corresponding pattern 2614 can be reliably illuminated.

Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached within the frame of the center role 2500 attached to the center role 2500 in the center of the front view game area 5a, even if the pattern 2614 is illuminated by the LED 2630, the light is emitted. The displayed pattern 2614 does not hinder the game in the game area 5a, the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in a good condition, and the game becomes difficult to see. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust and to enjoy the game in a good condition.

In addition, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed concave portion 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 can be separated from each other in comparison with the conventional case where two members are used for attachment. , and the plurality of LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned at desired positions with respect to the front light guide plate 2610 . Therefore, since the LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned with respect to the specific light entrance portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the light from the LEDs 2630 can be reliably irradiated to the corresponding specific light entrance portions 2612, and only the intended pattern 2614 can be displayed. Light emission display can be reliably performed.

Further, by arranging the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611, the front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) is arranged only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611. The front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) does not surround the outer periphery of the light guide plate body 2611, and the front cover (frame body) covers the entire periphery of the light guide plate body 2611. Since it is possible to avoid partitioning the effect image and the decorative body of the effect display device 1600 arranged in the space, the effect image etc. can be easily seen from the player side, and the effect image can be displayed to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed in a good state to suppress the decline in interest, and the pachinko machine 1 with a sense of openness can be provided by not having a frame-shaped partition in the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and the game area 5a. It is possible to improve the appearance of the inside and make it appealing to strongly attract the attention of the players.

In addition, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, by matching the periphery of the front light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500, the periphery of the front light guide plate 2610 (reflector 2620 and a plurality of LEDs 2630) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the front light guide plate 2610. A strong impact can be given to a player who thought that 2610 does not exist, and the player can be surprised, and the light emission display of a plurality of patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest. can.

Furthermore, since the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflectors 2620 are hidden from the player side by the front cover 2650, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the game area 5a from deteriorating due to the reflectors 2620 being visible. , the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved, the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 2630 are hidden from the player side by the front cover 2650, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630. By causing the pattern 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 to emit light, the player can be greatly surprised by the light emission display that the player did not expect, and the light emission display of the pattern 2614 can be enjoyed by the player. It is possible to make the player think that something good will happen to the player, raise expectations for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610, the light emission display of the plurality of patterns 2614 different from each other by the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 can be achieved. Since it is possible to show the player an effect that combines the above, various effects can be performed by appropriately combining them, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored. The player can be entertained by the performance by and can suppress the decline of the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600 are different, it is possible to give a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect to the luminescently displayed patterns 2614 by displaying an effect image associated with the plurality of luminescently displayed patterns 2614 on the front light guide plate 2610. A performance (display performance) capable of strongly attracting the player's interest can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In the above-described embodiment, the reflective concave portion 2613 has a triangular cross section that extends uniformly, but is not limited to this. may be polygonal and extending at a constant rate, or may have a curved cross section and extending at a constant rate, or the like.

Also, the LED 2630 may be monochromatic or full-color. Also, the plurality of patterns 2614 may be four or more, and the numbers of specific light incident portions, reflecting recesses, and LED groups can be appropriately selected according to the number of patterns 2614 .

[5-9. back unit]
The back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 116. FIG. FIG. 106 is a front view of the game board showing the state where the lower front center decorative body is illuminated in the lower movable production unit, and FIG. FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the lower rear central decoration body is illuminated, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the center decoration, the lower rear center decoration, the lower left side decoration, and the lower right side decoration are illuminated. FIG. 109 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the game board is in the state of FIG. 108 and the depressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. In addition, FIG. 110 shows four rotating decorations, a left-side rotating decoration, a left-side rotating decoration, a right-side rotating decoration, and a right-side rotating decoration in the lower movable production unit. It is an explanatory view schematically showing the decoration of. FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the types (sizes) of arrows that are light-emitting displayed in the lower movable production unit.

Also, FIG. 112 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit are lowered. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the drive mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram showing the structure of the clutch mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit is lowered. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder in the game panel 1100, and the performance display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting opening sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. 3002, and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 117).

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder and has a box shape with an open front. The attached lower movable production unit 3100, the upper rear movable production unit 3200 installed in the upper part in the back box, and the upper front installed in front of the upper rear movable production unit 3200 in the upper part in the back box. A movable production unit 3300 is provided.

[5-9a. Lower movable production unit]
The lower movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 111 and the like. The lower movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the lower part inside the back box, and a part of it is positioned in front of the lower part of the effect display device 1600 . The lower movable production unit 3100 includes a lower front center decoration unit 3110 attached near the front end of the back box below the production display device 1600 and a lower center production unit arranged behind the lower front center decoration unit 3110. 3120, and a lower left side effect unit 3150 and a lower right side effect unit 3170 arranged on both left and right sides of the lower center effect unit 3120, respectively.

The lower front center decoration unit 3110 includes a lower front center decoration body 3111 which is trapezoidal (inverted isosceles triangle with a flattened vertex) and has translucency. The lower front center decoration unit 3110 is positioned behind the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 in the state assembled to the game board 5 . The lower front center decoration body 3111 can be illuminated by the lower center decoration substrate of the lower center effect unit 3120 .

The lower central production unit 3120 is attached to a lower central elevating base 3121 which is mounted so as to be able to ascend and descend in the back box behind the lower front central decorative unit 3110, and is attached to the front surface of the lower central elevating base 3121, and has translucency. and a lower center decorative substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs arranged behind the lower rear center decoration 3122 and capable of irradiating light forward are mounted. omitted) and a central movable unit 3125 attached to the upper part of the lower central elevating base 3121 .

In addition, although illustration is omitted, the lower central production unit 3120 includes a unit base attached to the back box, a pair of lifting guides attached to the unit base and guiding the lower central lifting base in the vertical direction, and a unit A rod-like arm member attached to the base so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth at the base end, a sliding pin attached to the tip of the arm member and inserted into the slit of the lower central elevating base 3121, and the arm member. and a lower center lift drive motor for rotating.

Although not shown, the lower central elevating base 3121 has a slit extending left and right, and a sliding pin attached to the tip of the arm member is slidably inserted into this slit. The lower center elevating base 3121 is moved between a lowered position where the whole is behind the lower front center decorative body 3111 and a raised position where the whole is above the lower front center decorative body 3111 by a lower center lifting drive motor. Mounted so that it can be lifted.

The lower rear center decorative body 3122 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape and has a plurality of light emitting regions 3122a arranged vertically. The lower rear center decoration 3122 can be decorated with light emission by emitting light from the LED of the lower center decoration substrate. The lower central decoration board is mounted with a plurality of LEDs so that each light emitting area 3122a of the lower rear central decoration 3122 can be independently illuminated, and the lower central elevating base 3121 is raised. Sometimes, it is mounted so that it can irradiate light toward the lower front central decorative body 3111 which is downward and forward.

Although not shown in detail, the central movable unit 3125 is attached to the upper end of the lower central elevating base 3121 at intervals in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of mounting bases each extending upward in a flat plate shape. a plurality of central rotary drive motors attached to a plurality of mounting bases with their rotary shafts oriented in the left-right direction; and a plurality of cubic rotary decorations 3126 covering the . A plurality of rotating ornamental bodies 3126 are rotatable around a laterally extending axis by a central rotary drive motor, and are arranged coaxially in the lateral direction. In addition, each rotating decorative body 3126 has different decorative portions 3127 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). The plurality of rotary decorations 3126 can be independently rotated by respective central rotary drive motors.

Although not shown, the central movable unit 3125 is attached below each rotary decoration 3126 on the upper surface of the lower central elevating base 3121, and has a plurality of units capable of irradiating light toward each rotary decoration 3126. It has a bottom center top decorative substrate on which LEDs are mounted. Each rotating decorative body 3126 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LEDs of the lower central upper surface decorative substrate.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 of the lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a flat plate-shaped lower piece extending horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped side extending upward from the left end of the lower piece. It has a side part and a flat upper side part extending rightward from the upper end of the side part to the upper side of the lower piece part shorter than the lower piece part, and the front of the unit base of the lower central effect unit 3120 A left unit base installed in the back box on the left side of the view, and a cylindrical guide shaft near the right side of the left unit base whose lower and upper ends are attached to the lower and upper pieces, respectively. and a rod-shaped male screw member which is rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically by the lower piece and the upper piece of the left unit base so as to extend parallel to the guide shaft, and has a male screw formed on its outer circumference. , a lower left side elevating base 3151 having a nut screwed to the male screw member and slidably attached to the guide shaft, and a lower left side elevation base 3151 attached to the left unit base and rotating the male screw member A side lifting drive motor, a translucent lower left side decorative body 3152 attached to the front surface of the lower left side lifting base 3151, and a light-transmitting lower left side decorative body 3152 attached to the right side of the lower left side decoration body 3152 and moving left a lower left side decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted.

The lower left side decorative body 3152 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3152a arranged in a vertical direction, and by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left side decorative substrate to emit light, each light emitting region 3152a can be independently decorated with light emission.

In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached to the upper part of the lower left side elevating base 3151 so as to be slidable in the left and right direction, and has a slit extending back and forth. A lower left slide driving motor is attached to the rear side of the lower left side elevating base 3151 so that the rotating shaft extends upward under the slider, and the base end side is attached to the rotating shaft of the lower left slide driving motor. a cam member having a cylindrical sliding pin slidably inserted into a slit of the slider on the distal end side extending horizontally from the proximal end side of the cage.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 has a mounting base that is mounted on the slider and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and a state that the rotation axis is directed to the mounting base in the left and right direction. It has an attached left side rotation drive motor, and a cubic left side rotation decoration 3153 attached to the rotating shaft of the left side rotation drive motor and covering the outer periphery of the left side rotation drive motor. The left side rotating decorative body 3153 has different decorative portions 3154 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). In addition, the left side rotary decoration body 3153 is rotatable around a laterally extending axis by a left side rotary drive motor.

In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached below the left side rotary decoration 3153 on the upper surface of the slider, and can irradiate light toward the left side rotary decoration 3153. It has a lower left side top decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. By appropriately lighting the LEDs of the lower left side upper surface decorative substrate, the left side rotating decorative body 3153 can be decorated with light.

Furthermore, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece of the left unit base and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and the sub mounting base A left sub-side rotation drive motor mounted with its rotational axis directed in the left-right direction, and a left sub-side rotation cubic mounted on the rotational shaft of the left sub-side rotation drive motor and covering the outer periphery of the left sub-side rotation drive motor A decorative body 3155 is provided. The left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 has different decorations 3156 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). In addition, the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 is rotatable around a laterally extending axis by a left sub-side rotating drive motor.

In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached below the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 on the upper surface of the upper piece of the left unit base, and faces the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155. and a lower left subside top decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted. The left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 can be decorated with light emission by properly lighting the LED of the lower left sub-side upper surface decorative substrate.

When the lower left side effect unit 3150 is assembled on the game board 5, the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 attached to the left unit base is positioned at a height such that the left side rotary decoration 3153 can enter below. It is arranged at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3126 when the lower central elevating base 3121 of the central effect unit 3120 is positioned (raised) to the raised end. In addition, the lower left side effect unit 3150 has a left side rotating decorative body 3153 between the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 and the leftmost rotating decorative body 3126 of the lower central effect unit 3120 when assembled on the game board 5. are spaced so that they can enter.

The lower left side effect unit 3150 rotates the male screw member by the lower left side elevation drive motor, thereby moving the left side rotating decorative body 3153 together with the slider via the lower left side elevation base 3151 to the lower central effect unit 3120. The lower central elevating base 3121 can be lifted between a lowered position slightly higher than the height of the rotary decoration 3126 at the lowered position and an elevated position at the same height as the left subside rotary decoration 3155 . In addition, the lower left side effect unit 3150 rotates the cam member by the lower left slide drive motor, thereby moving the left side rotating decorative body 3153 through the slider to the appearance position adjacent to the lower center effect unit 3120. , and a retracted position where about half of it is positioned below the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 away from the lower central effect unit 3120, and can be slid in the left-right direction.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 of the lower movable effect unit 3100 has a flat plate-like lower piece extending horizontally, and a flat plate-like side extending upward from the right end of the lower piece. It has a side part and a flat plate-shaped upper side part extending leftward from the upper end of the side part to the upper side of the lower piece part and shorter than the lower piece part, and the front of the unit base of the lower central effect unit 3120 A right unit base installed in the back box on the right side of the view, and a cylindrical guide shaft near the left side of the right unit base whose lower and upper ends are attached to the lower and upper pieces, respectively. and a rod-shaped male screw member which is rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically by the lower piece and the upper piece of the right unit base so as to extend parallel to the guide shaft, and has a male screw formed on its outer circumference. , a lower right side elevating base 3171 having a nut screwed to the male screw member and slidably attached to the guide shaft, and a lower right side elevation base 3171 attached to the right unit base and rotating the male screw member A side elevation drive motor, a translucent lower right side decoration 3172 attached to the front surface of the lower right side elevation base 3171, and a right side of the lower right side decoration 3172 attached to the right side. a lower right side decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted.

The lower right side decorative body 3172 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3172a arranged in a vertical direction, and by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right side decorative substrate to emit light, each light emitting region 3172a can be independently decorated with light.

In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to the upper part of the lower right side elevating base 3171 so as to be slidable in the left and right direction, and has a slit extending back and forth. A lower right slide drive motor is attached to the rear side of the lower right side elevating base 3171 so that the rotation shaft extends upward under the slider, and the base end side is attached to the rotation shaft of the lower right slide drive motor. a cam member having a cylindrical sliding pin slidably inserted into a slit of the slider on the distal end side extending horizontally from the proximal end side of the cage.

Furthermore, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to the slider and has a mounting base extending upward in a flat plate shape, and a state in which the rotation axis is directed to the mounting base in the left and right direction. It has an attached right side rotation drive motor, and a cubic right side rotation decoration 3173 attached to the rotation shaft of the right side rotation drive motor and covering the outer circumference of the right side rotation drive motor. The right-side rotating decorative body 3173 has different decorative portions 3174 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). In addition, the right side rotating decorative body 3173 is rotatable around a laterally extending axis by a right side rotating drive motor.

In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached below the right side rotary decoration 3173 on the upper surface of the slider, and can irradiate light toward the right side rotary decoration 3173. It has a lower right side top decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The right side rotating decorative body 3173 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LEDs of the lower right side upper surface decorative substrate.

Furthermore, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece of the right unit base and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and the sub mounting base A right sub-side rotation drive motor mounted with its rotational axis directed in the horizontal direction, and a cubic right sub-side rotation mounted on the rotation shaft of the right sub-side rotation drive motor and covering the outer circumference of the right sub-side rotation drive motor. A decorative body 3175 is provided. The right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 has different decorative portions 3176 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). In addition, the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 is rotatable around a laterally extending axis by a right sub-side rotating drive motor.

In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached below the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 on the upper surface of the upper piece of the right unit base, and faces the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175. and a lower right subside top decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted. The right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 can be decorated with light emission by properly lighting the LED of the lower right sub-side upper surface decorative substrate.

When the lower right side effect unit 3170 is assembled on the game board 5, the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 attached to the right unit base is positioned at a height such that the right side rotary decoration 3173 can enter below. It is arranged at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3126 when the lower central elevating base 3121 of the central effect unit 3120 is positioned (raised) to the raised end. In addition, the lower right side production unit 3170 has a right side rotary decoration 3173 between the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 and the rightmost rotary decoration 3126 of the lower central production unit 3120 when assembled on the game board 5. are spaced so that they can enter.

The lower right side effect unit 3170 rotates the male screw member by the lower right side elevation drive motor, thereby moving the right side rotating decorative body 3173 together with the slider via the lower right side elevation base 3171 to the lower central effect unit 3120. The lower central elevating base 3121 can be lifted between a lowered position slightly higher than the height of the rotary decoration 3126 at the lowered position and an elevated position at the same height as the right subside rotary decoration 3175 . In addition, the lower right side effect unit 3170 rotates the cam member by the lower right slide drive motor, so that the right side rotating decorative body 3173 is moved to the appearance position adjacent to the lower center effect unit 3120 through the slider. , and a retracted position in which about half of it is positioned below the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 away from the lower central effect unit 3120, and can be slid in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 110, the lower movable effect unit 3100 includes the decoration parts 3127 of the four rotary decorations 3126, the decoration part 3154 of the left side rotation decoration 3153, the decoration part 3156 of the left sub-side rotation decoration 3155, the right Different decorations are formed on the decoration portion 3174 of the side rotating decoration body 3173 and the decoration portion 3176 of the right sub-side rotating decoration body 3175, respectively. The four rotating decorations 3126, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 are each formed in a dice-shaped cube and extend left and right. Decorations different from each other are formed on the first to fourth surfaces around the rotating shaft.

When the first surface of each of the four rotating decorations 3126, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the left subside rotating decoration 3155, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right subside rotating decoration 3175 is facing the front, It is "o" "one eye" "one eye" "two eyes" "three eyes" "four eyes" "one eye" "o". In addition, when the second surface of each is turned to the front, from the left, "star", "super", "chi", "cha", "n", "su", "!", and "star". In addition, when the third side is facing the front, from the left, "!" Furthermore, when the fourth side is facing the front, from the left are "celebration", "!", "o", "me", "de", "to", "u", and "!!".

In this way, the surfaces of the four rotating decorations 3126, left side rotating decoration 3153, left subside rotating decoration 3155, right side rotating decoration 3173, and right subside rotating decoration 3175 are turned to the front. , a predetermined message can be shown to the player, and an expected value for a "big win" can be displayed depending on the content of the message.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 111, the lower movable effect unit 3100 appropriately emits light from the lower front center decoration 3111, the lower rear center decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, and the lower right side decoration 3172. "Arrows" of different sizes can be illuminated. Specifically, when only the lower front central decorative body 3111 is illuminated, a triangular "small arrow" with the vertex of an isosceles triangle pointing downward can be illuminated (see FIGS. 106 and 111(a)). reference). In addition, when the lower front central decoration 3111 and the raised lower rear central decoration 3122 are illuminated, a downward facing "middle arrow" having a bar extending upward larger than the "small arrow" is illuminated. (see FIGS. 107 and 111(b)). Furthermore, in the state of the "center arrow", the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 are raised, and the lower front central decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, and the lower right side decoration body are lifted. When all the side decorations 3172 are illuminated, it is possible to illuminate a "large arrow" in which the upper end of an arrow that is larger than the "middle arrow" and is directed downward spreads to the left and right (FIGS. 108 and 111(c)). ).

In this way, three arrows of different sizes, ie, small arrow, medium arrow, and large arrow, can be displayed by light emission. ” can be illuminated to indicate that the expected value is high.

Next, an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100 will be described. In the normal state, the lower movable effect unit 3100 is in a lowered position in which the lower center elevating base 3121 is located behind the lower front center decoration unit 3110 in the lower center effect unit 3120 as shown in FIG. , and the four rotary decorations 3126 attached to the upper end of the lower central elevating base 3121 are positioned so as to contact the upper end of the lower front central decoration 3111 in a front view.

In addition, in the normal state, in the lower left side effect unit 3150, the lower left side elevating base 3151 is positioned slightly above the upper end of the lower front central decoration unit 3110 and in a lowered position that is almost invisible from the front. The left side rotary decoration 3153 is separated leftward from the lower central effect unit 3120 via the slider, and is located at a retreat position where about half of it is below the left subside rotary decoration 3155, and the left subside rotary decoration 3155 is in the game. It is located in the vicinity of the left end near the bottom from the center in the vertical direction in the region 5a.

Furthermore, in the normal state, in the lower right side effect unit 3170, the lower right side elevating base 3171 is positioned slightly above the upper end of the lower front central decoration unit 3110 and in a lowered position that is almost invisible from the front. The right side rotary decoration 3173 is separated rightward from the lower central effect unit 3120 via the slider, and is located at a retracted position where about half of it is below the right subside rotary decoration 3175, and the right subside rotary decoration 3175 is in the game. It is located in the vicinity of the right end near the bottom from the center in the vertical direction in the area 5a.

In this normal state, as one of the effects presented to the player, for example, the first special lottery result or the second special According to the result of the lottery, after rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the rotation of each rotating decorative body 3126 is stopped, and the decorative parts 3127 facing forward in each rotating decorative body 3126 whose rotation is stopped are combined. is visually recognized by the player. Thereby, depending on whether or not the rotation of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 stops in a desired combination, the player can feel nervous and excited, and can enjoy the movable presentation by the four rotating decorative bodies 3126.例文帳に追加Then, when the combination of the decorative portions 3127 of the four rotary decorative bodies 3126 whose rotation is stopped satisfies a predetermined condition, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 is attached to the lower central elevating base 3121 by the lower central decorative substrate. to emit light to decorate the lower front center decoration body 3111 of the lower front center decoration unit 3110 positioned in front. As a result, as shown in FIG. 106, a downward arrow is illuminated by the lower front central decorative body 3111. This downward arrow illuminates and directs the player's line of sight to the lower part of the game area 5a. It is possible to guide the player to the effect operation unit 301 arranged in the above, to prompt the player to operate the effect operation unit 301, and to easily make the player participate in the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. This allows the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance and suppress the decline in interest.

Alternatively, according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B from the normal state to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the lower central lifting base 3121 Raise from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the four rotary decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front view game area 5a so as to block part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the game is played. As well as being able to surprise the player, the player can be made to think that something good will happen, and the expectation for the game can be heightened. After that, after rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the rotation of each rotating decorative body 3126 is stopped, and the combination of decoration parts 3127 facing forward in each rotating decorative body 3126 whose rotation is stopped is given to the player. make visible. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that if the four rotary ornaments 3126 stop rotating in a desired combination, it must be a "big hit" (a result of a lottery that generates an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous). Depending on whether or not the rotation of the four rotary decorative bodies 3126 stops in a desired combination, the player can feel nervous and excited, and the expectation for the lottery result can be heightened. Then, when the combination of the decorative portions 3127 of the four rotary decorative bodies 3126 whose rotation is stopped satisfies a predetermined condition, the plurality of lower central decorative substrates attached to the ascending lower central elevating base 3121 The LEDs are caused to emit light, and the lower rear central decorative body 3122 arranged in front and the lower front central decorative body 3111 arranged in the lower front are decorated with light. As a result, as shown in FIG. 107, a large downward arrow is illuminated by the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the lower front central ornament 3111, so that the large downward arrow emits light to display the game. The player's line of sight can be guided to the production operation section 301 arranged below the game area 5a to prompt the player to operate the production operation section 301, and the production operation section 301 can be operated by light emission display of a large arrow. By operating, it is possible to make the player think that it will be a "big hit", and the player can be made to operate the performance operation section 301 to enjoy the player participation type performance.

Furthermore, according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 from the normal state, the lower central lifting base 3121 from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the four rotary decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front view game area 5a so as to block part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the game is played. As well as being able to surprise the player, the player can be made to think that something good will happen, and the expectation for the game can be heightened. Next, after sliding the left and right side rotating decorative bodies 3153 and right side rotating decorative bodies 3173 to the appearance positions on the central side, the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 are respectively lifted. Raise to raised position (see Figure 108). As a result, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the four rotating decorations 3126, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 are arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be made to think that the lottery result is a "big win", thereby increasing the player's expectation for the game. After that, after rotating the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the four rotating decorations 3126, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175, the rotation is stopped. The decoration part 3156 of the sub-side rotary decoration 3155, the decoration part 3154 of the left-side rotary decoration 3153, the decoration parts 3127 of the four rotary decorations 3126, the decoration part 3174 of the right-side rotary decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotary decoration The player is made to visually recognize the combination of the decoration part 3176 of the body 3175 . At this time, since the plurality of decorative portions 3127 includes the decorative portion 3127 decorated with numbers, by stopping the rotation so that the decorative portions 3127 with numbers face forward, the countdown can be started. The countdown effect makes the player think that the result of the lottery must be a ``jackpot'', thereby enhancing the interest in the game. When the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the four rotating decorations 3126, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 stop rotating and the countdown ends, The lower front center decoration 3111, the lower rear center decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, and the lower right side decoration 3172 are decorated with light. As a result, as shown in FIG. 108, an even larger downward arrow (giant arrow) is displayed by light emission. , it is possible to convince the player that the lottery result is a ``big win'', and the player can be made to operate the presentation operation section 301 without fail. When this giant arrow is illuminated, a message explaining the effect operation section 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation part 301 is raised, and the effect operation part 301 is rotated. Rotate the operation unit 302 at high speed (see FIG. 109). As a result, the rotary operation unit 302 rotates at a high speed, so that the interest of the player can be increased, so that the pressing operation unit 303 can be reliably pressed, and the player is entertained and the interest is lowered. can be suppressed.

As an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100, in FIG. The player is informed that the higher the rotational speed of the part 302, the higher the expected value of a "big hit". In other words, the expected value is represented by the rotation speed of the rotary operation unit 302, and the effect display device 1600 displays the effect image for informing the player of the expected value.

On the other hand, in FIG. 109, as the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 includes, as shown in FIG. An effect image suggesting an operation method of the effect operation unit 301 that prompts the player's operation by means of an "arrow" illuminated by the body 3152, the lower right side decorative body 3172, etc. may be displayed. Specifically, effects images such as "Press the button!", "Turn the dial!", "Turn the dial to the left!", "Turn the dial to the right!", etc. are displayed. As a result, it is possible to accurately perform the operation on the performance operation section 301, and to surely enjoy the player-participation type performance that operates the performance operation section 301. - 特許庁

Then, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301, a predetermined effect image is displayed in the effect display device 1600, and the expected value of the "big hit" may be displayed by the effect image. Using four rotating decorations 3126, a left side rotating decoration 3153, a left subside rotating decoration 3155, a right side rotating decoration 3173, and a right subside rotating decoration 3175, each of which is formed like a dice, the expected value is calculated. You may make it display.

As an expected value display using four dice-shaped rotary decorations 3126, left side rotary decoration 3153, left subside rotary decoration 3155, right side rotary decoration 3173, and right subside rotary decoration 3175. 3127, 3154, 3156, 3174, and 3176, which face the front by rotating and stopping, are combined to display the expected value of "big hit". . Specifically, when using only the four rotary decorations 3126 of the lower central effect unit 3120 in the center, there are, for example, the following three patterns. The pattern a1 displays the expected value in a state in which the combination of the decorative parts 3127 facing the front when the four rotary decorative bodies 3126 stop rotating is a random combination in which the player cannot read the meaning. no pattern. The pattern a2 has a relatively high expected value in a state in which the rotation of each rotating decorative body 3126 is stopped with the second surface facing the front, and the combination of the decorative parts 3127 is "C", "C", "N", and "S". A pattern indicating that Pattern a3 has a very high expected value, in which each of the rotating decorative bodies 3126 stops rotating with the third surface facing the front, and the combination of the decorative parts 3127 is "ge", "ki", "a", and "tsu". A pattern indicating that In this way, the expected value can be displayed by the patterns displayed by stopping the rotation of the four rotary decorations 3126, and the expected value increases in the order of pattern a1, pattern a2, and pattern a3.

Furthermore, as an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100, all four rotating decorations 3126, left side rotating decoration 3153, left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, right side rotating decoration 3173, right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 ( Eight) dice-shaped rotating bodies are used, and the combination of the decoration part 3127, the decoration part 3154, the decoration part 3156, the decoration part 3174, and the decoration part 3176 displays the expected value of "big hit". You can do it. Specifically, there are the following six patterns. The pattern b1 is a random combination of the decorative portions 3127, 3154, 3156, 3174, and 3176 whose rotation is stopped (no display of expected values). In pattern b2, the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 is "o" or "star", the left side rotary decoration 3153 is "!" A combination of "!" or "o" for the right side rotary decoration 3173 and "o" or "star" for the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 (chance display). In pattern b3, the left side rotary decoration 3155 is "o" or "star", the left side rotary decoration 3153 is "!" A combination of "!" or "凰" for the right-side rotary decoration 3173, and "凰" or "STAR" for the right-side rotary decoration 3175 (Gekiatsu display). In pattern b4, the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 is "o" or "star", the left side rotary decoration 3153 is "super", and the four central rotary decorations 3126 are "chi", "cha", "n" and "su". ”, the right side rotary decoration 3173 is “!”, and the right subside rotary decoration 3175 is a combination of “凰” or “STAR” (super chance display). In pattern b5, the left side rotary decoration 3155 is "o" or "star", the left side rotary decoration 3153 is "super", and the four central rotary decorations 3126 are "ge", "ki", "a", and "tsu". ”, the right-side rotary decoration 3173 is “!”, and the right-side rotary decoration 3175 is “凰” or “星” (Super Gekiatsu display). In pattern b6, the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 is "Congratulations", the left side rotary decoration 3153 is "!", the four central rotary decorations 3126 are "O", "Me", "De", and "To", and the right side is A combination of "U" for the rotary decoration 3173 and "!!" for the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 ("big hit" confirmed). In this way, it is displayed by stopping the rotation of the eight rotating bodies: the four rotating decorations 3126, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175. The expected value can be displayed according to the pattern, and the expected value increases in the order of pattern b1, pattern b2, pattern b3, pattern b4, pattern b5, and pattern b6.

In the above effect, if the player does not operate the effect operation unit 301 within a certain period of time after being prompted to operate the effect operation unit 301, the effect of displaying the expected value as described above is not performed. , the light-emitting display of the "arrow" is also extinguished. On the other hand, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301 within a certain period of time after being prompted to operate the effect operation unit 301, the remaining effect time is used to display the expected value as described above. When the effect time is over, the effect as described above ends, and the light-emitting display of the "arrow" is extinguished, and the effect ends.

Thus, according to the lower movable effect unit 3100, when the game state changes due to the game being played in the game area 5a in the normal state (the game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (Depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by acceptance of B), the four rotating decorations 3126 aligned left and right on the upper side of the lower front center decoration 3111 rotate, or the lower center The four rotary decorations 3126 aligned to the left and right by the lifting base 3121 rise together with the lower rear center decoration 3122, or the four rotary decorations 3126 raised by the lower center lifting base 3121 rotate, and the lower left A pair of left side rotating decorative body 3153 and right side rotating decorative body 3173 are slid in the horizontal direction by the lower left slide drive motor of the side effect unit 3150 and the lower right slide drive motor of the lower right side effect unit 3170 (slide mechanism). The left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3173 rotate, and the left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3153 rotate by the slide mechanism and the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171. The four rotating decorations 3126, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 are arranged in the left-right direction, and the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 rotate. , so that the player can see the movable effects such as the central movable unit 3125 (four rotating decorative bodies 3126), the left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the left sub-side rotating decoration body. The decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 can be noticed, and the movement performance by them can be enjoyed.

In addition, when the lower central elevating base 3121 is located at the lower end, the lower rear central decoration body 3122 is illuminated and the lower front central decoration body 3111 is illuminated to display a downward arrow or elevate the lower central part. By raising the base 3121 and illuminating the lower rear center decoration 3122 and the lower front center decoration 3111 with a plurality of LEDs on the lower center decoration board, a large downward arrow can be illuminated, or a pair of lower left sides can be raised and lowered. By raising the base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 and causing the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 to emit light, a larger downward arrow can be displayed by light emission. The player can also be entertained by the performance, and the player's line of sight can be guided to the performance operation section 301 below by the downward arrow displayed by light emission, and the player can operate the performance operation section 301. can encourage In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, and the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed to participate in the player participation type effect. and entertain.

Therefore, since it is possible to perform a variety of movable effects, light emitting effects, and player-participating effects as described above, it is possible to present various patterns of effects to the player by appropriately combining them. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored and to make it difficult for the player to anticipate the performance pattern, it is possible to surprise the player by performing an unexpected performance. can be entertained and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, the lower front center decoration 3111, the lower rear center decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, the lower right side decoration 3172, etc. are caused to emit light to display a downward arrow, so that the player can see the downward arrow. When prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301, the effect display device 1600 displays a effect image prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301, a effect image explaining the operation of the effect operation unit 301, and an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous. By displaying an effect image showing the relationship between the occurrence of and the effect operation unit 301, the player can be strongly encouraged to participate in the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. The effect operation section 301 can be easily operated, and the player's participatory effect can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

[5-9b. Upper rear movable production unit]
The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114 and the like. The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached above the effect display device 1600 and in the upper part of the back box. The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 comprises an upper rear left unit 3210 attached to the upper left corner inside the back box and an upper rear right unit 3230 attached to the upper right corner inside the back box.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper rear left unit 3210 of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the left base 3211 attached in the back box and to the left base 3211 so as to be slidable in an oblique direction from the upper left to the lower right. a linear rack gear 3213 attached to the left slider 3212; an upper rear left driving motor 3214 attached to the left base 3211 with its rotational axis facing forward and backward; A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the drive motor 3214 and connected to the input side of the rotating shaft of the upper rear left drive motor 3214, a drive gear 3215 having a spur gear shape connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250, A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3216 meshing with the drive gear 3215 and rotatably attached to the left base 3211, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3216 meshing with the first transmission gear 3216 and rotatably attached to the left base 3211 a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3217, a third transmission gear 3218 meshing with the second transmission gear 3217 and rotatably attached to the left base 3211, a third transmission gear 3218 and a rack gear 3213, respectively. and a spur-like pinion gear 3219 that meshes with and is rotatably attached to the left base 3211 .

In addition, the upper rear left unit 3210 is attached to the lower end of the left slider 3212 and has a flat plate-like upper rear left decoration 3220 extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the upper rear left decoration 3220 and has a front surface. and an upper rear left decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear left decoration 3220 can be decorated with light emission by causing a plurality of LEDs on the upper rear left decoration substrate to emit light.

The upper rear left unit 3210 can move the upper rear left decoration 3220 up and down via the rack gear 3213 by driving the upper rear left driving motor 3214 .

The upper rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the right base 3231 and the right base 3231 so as to be slidable in an oblique direction from the upper right to the lower left, although detailed illustration is omitted. a straight rack gear 3233 attached to the right slider 3232; an upper rear right drive motor 3234 attached to the right base 3231 with its rotational axis facing forward and backward; A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to a motor 3234 and connected to the input side of the rotating shaft of the upper rear right drive motor 3234; A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3236 that meshes with the gear 3235 and is rotatably attached to the right base 3231, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3236 that meshes with the first transmission gear 3236 and is rotatably attached to the right base 3231. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3237, a third transmission gear 3238 meshing with the second transmission gear 3237 and rotatably attached to the right base 3231, and meshing with the third transmission gear 3238 and the rack gear 3233, respectively. and a spur-shaped pinion gear 3239 rotatably attached to the right base 3231 .

In addition, the upper rear right unit 3230 is attached to the lower end of the right slider 3232 and has a flat plate-shaped upper rear right decoration 3240 extending in the left and right direction, and the upper rear right decoration 3240 is attached to the rear side of the upper rear right decoration and is attached to the front surface. and an upper rear right decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear right decoration 3240 can be decorated with light emission by causing a plurality of LEDs on the upper rear right decoration substrate to emit light.

The upper rear right unit 3230 can move the upper rear right decorative body 3240 up and down via the rack gear 3233 by driving the upper rear right drive motor 3234 .

The clutch mechanism 3250 has a cylindrical storage case 3251 and a plurality of protrusions 3252a radially extending to the vicinity of the inner surface of the storage case 3251 in the storage case 3251. An input member 3252 to which the rotation shaft of the rear right drive motor 3234 is attached, and a plurality of transmission grooves 3253a in which the projecting portion 3252a of the input member 3252 is inserted in the storage case 3251 with a gap in the circumferential direction. A plurality of cam surfaces 3253b formed so that the distance between them and the inner surface of the storage case 3251 becomes narrower as they approach the projecting portion 3252a of the input member 3252, and the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 protruding from the storage case 3251. , a plurality of rollers 3254 inserted between a plurality of cam surfaces 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251, and the storage case 3251. A main body housing 3256 having a tightening spring 3255 that tightens from the outside, a housing recess 3256a that houses the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and that is attached to the left base 3211 or the right base 3231; A lid member 3257 that closes a housing recess 3256a of the output member 3256 and through which the output shaft 3253c of the output member 3253 penetrates; (See FIGS. 114(a)-(c)).

In the clutch mechanism 3250, when the input member 3252 is rotated by the upper rear left driving motor 3214 or the upper rear right driving motor 3234, the plurality of projecting portions 3252a of the input member 3252 engage the circumferential ends of the transmission grooves 3253a of the output member 3253. As a result, the output member 3253 rotates, and the driving gear 3215 or the driving gear 3235 attached to the output shaft 3253c of the output member 3253 rotates. That is, the clutch mechanism 3250 can transmit the rotation from the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 to the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 as it is.

In addition, when the clutch mechanism 3250 rotates the output member 3253 via the output shaft 3253c from the drive gear 3215 or drive gear 3235 side, the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 moves toward the projecting portion 3252a of the input member 3252. Therefore, the space between the cam surface 3253b and the inner surface of the storage case 3251 becomes narrow, and the roller 3254 is caught in the space. As a result, the rotation of the output member 3253 is blocked, the rotation of the driving gear 3215 or the driving gear 3235 is locked, and the rotation from the driving gear 3215 or the driving gear 3235 side is transmitted via the input member 3252 to the upper rear side. There is no transmission to the left drive motor 3214 or upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Therefore, even if gravity acts to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 downward, the clutch mechanism 3250 rotates the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 through the output member 3253 . Since the rotation is locked, the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 do not move downward without permission, and a load is applied to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at arbitrary positions.

In the clutch mechanism 3250 of this embodiment, the storage case 3251 is tightened from the outer peripheral side by a tightening spring 3255 made of a coil spring, and the tightening spring 3255 and the storage case 3251 are housed in the storage recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. Therefore, when the rotational load (torque) applied to the output member 3253 from the drive gear 3215 or drive gear 3235 through the output shaft 3253c becomes larger than a predetermined amount, the tightening force (biasing force) of the tightening spring 3255 ), the circumferential end portion of the transmission groove 3253 a of the output member 3253 abuts against the projection 3252 a of the input member 3252 , and the rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252 . As a result, when an attempt is made to rotate the output member 3253 from the output side with a strong force, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 that tightens the housing case 3251 and the housing case 3251, and the rotational force is transferred to the upper rear left side. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side and escaped, the roller 3254 is strongly caught and the lock cannot be released, and the output member 3253 and the storage case 3251 may be damaged. can be prevented.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 114(d), the clutch mechanism 3250 inserts two rollers 3254 between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 may be biased by the lock spring 3260 toward the protruding portion 3252a near them. As a result, when a force to rotate the output member 3253 acts from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately moved between the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251 . The rotation (rotation angle) of the output member 3253 from the action of rotation from the upper rear left decoration 3220 side and the upper rear right decoration 3240 side until the lock is applied is can be reduced as much as possible.

Next, an effect using the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 will be described. In a normal state, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is positioned above the effect display device 1600 and behind the upper front movable effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 is in a state where it cannot be visually recognized from the player side. In this normal state, the upper rear left driving motor 3214 and the upper rear right driving motor 3234 are in a non-driving state, respectively. , the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, the rotation of the drive gear 3215 and the drive gear 3235 is locked via the output member 3253, and the upper The rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 do not move downward without permission.

Accordingly, in order to prevent the downward movement of the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240, the upper rear left driving motor 3214 and the upper rear right driving motor 3234 are continuously driven or moved downward. There is no need to provide an electric lock mechanism for blocking the pachinko machine 1, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. In addition, the presence of the clutch mechanism 3250 can prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving freely. Even if vibrations and accelerations are applied in such a case, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 remain in the state of the origin at the time of shipment, and there is no need to perform unnecessary origin adjustment. It is possible to reduce the labor involved in installing the game board 5, and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

In this normal state, according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 move obliquely downward toward the center through the clutch mechanism 3250, respectively, and the upper rear left decoration 3220 moves. and the left end of the upper rear right decoration 3240 abut to form one large decoration (see FIG. 112). As a result, a large decorative body extending to the left and right appears on the front upper portion of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be surprised, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

Thus, according to the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, the upper rear left drive motor 3214, the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 (the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between each decoration body 3240), the vibration from the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, other movable decoration bodies, etc., and the left slider 3212 and right slider 3232 and the upper Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 tries to rotate due to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 trying to descend due to gravity acting on the rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240, the output The cam surface 3253b of the member 3253 presses the roller 3254 toward the inner surface of the storage case 3251, and the roller 3254 is caught between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the output member 3253 side (upper rear side) is pushed. Transmission of rotation from the left ornament 3220 side and the upper rear right ornament 3240 side to the upper rear left driving motor 3214 side and the upper rear right driving motor 3234 side is cut off, and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from descending freely, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are moved unexpectedly through the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232. To prevent movement (falling) and to avoid unintended movement of an upper rear left decoration body 3220 and an upper rear right decoration body 3240, thereby giving a player a sense of distrust. This allows the player to enjoy the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

Further, as described above, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side try to descend, the rotation of the output member 3253 can be restricted and locked by the clutch mechanism 3250, so that the left slider 3212 and Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at an arbitrary height position through the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be varied. A player can be shown a variety of performance patterns of lifting and stopping at a position, and the player is hardly bored with the movable performance of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can be made

In addition, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are stopped at any position in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3240 can be stopped. It is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, and it is possible to prevent early damage to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 due to overload. Disturbance of the game due to breakage of the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be avoided to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to suppress the player's interest in the game from decreasing. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 114(d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 are locked by the lock springs 3260, respectively. In the case of biasing toward the protruding portion 3252a closer to each other, the roller 3254 is immediately pushed when the force to rotate the output member 3253 acts from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side. can be engaged between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251, and the lock is locked after the rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side acts. The rotation of the output member 3253 until such time can be reduced as much as possible. As a result, when the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are moved downward by the upper rear left driving motor 3214 and the upper rear right driving motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 descend smoothly without jerking. Therefore, the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 does not give the player a sense of incongruity in the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are respectively moved downward to bring the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 into contact with each other. Since the upper rear right decorative bodies 3240 can be combined to form a large decorative body, a large decorative body can be formed by combining them to give a strong impact to the player, thereby making the player happy. At the same time, the appearance of the large decoration can make the player think that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot game") in which the player has an advantage will occur, and expectations for the game can be made. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by enhancing the feeling. When the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are brought into contact with each other, the mutual contact causes the upper rear right decorative body 3240 or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 to move. However, since each has a clutch mechanism 3250, the force to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (to rotate from the output side). Even if the force is applied, the roller 3254 is caught between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251, thereby locking the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. The movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented by contact with each other, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body can be prevented from moving by contact with each other. The return of the 3240 can also be prevented, and the movable effect of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 contacting and uniting can be surely enjoyed by the player and the decline of interest can be suppressed. .

In the clutch mechanism 3250, the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, and the tightening spring 3255 and the housing case 3251 are housed in the housing recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. 3253 is rotated to press the roller 3254 against the inner surface of the storage case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253, and the roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. Therefore, when a force to rotate the storage case 3251 acts via the plurality of rollers 3254 , the force (torque) to rotate the storage case 3251 becomes frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255 . If it is larger than , a slip occurs between the storage case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, causing the storage case 3251 to rotate. When the storage case 3251 rotates, the output member 3253 rotates via a plurality of rollers 3254, and the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 comes into contact with the projecting portion 3252a of the input member 3252. Rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252 . As a result, when an attempt is made to rotate the output member 3253 from the output side with a strong force, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 that tightens the housing case 3251 and the housing case 3251, and the rotational force is transferred to the upper rear left side. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side and escaped, the roller 3254 is strongly caught and the lock cannot be released, and the output member 3253 and the storage case 3251 may be damaged. It is possible to realize the pachinko machine 1 that can prevent the above-described actions and effects from occurring.

[5-9c. Upper front movable production unit]
The upper front movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116. FIG. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the front side of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the upper part in the back box above the effect display device 1600 in the front view. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 includes a horizontally long unit base 3301 attached to the upper part of the back box, an upper front drive motor 3302 attached to the unit base 3301, and a vertically movable unit attached to the unit base 3301. and an upper front movable decorative body 3350 that moves up and down by driving the upper front drive motor 3302 .

The upper front movable decoration 3350 includes a circular center decoration 3351 attached to the center of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction so that it can be raised and lowered in the vertical direction (downward). A pair of first protruding decorative parts 3352a and a pair of first protruding decorative parts 3352a are connected to each other and attached to the rear side of the central decorative body 3351 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A first projecting decoration 3352 having a connecting rod 3352b, a pair of second projecting decorations 3353a arranged on both left and right sides of the central decoration 3351, and a pair of second projecting decorations 3353a are connected to each other. It has a second connecting rod 3353b coaxially attached to the first connecting rod 3352b of the first projecting decoration 3352 and rotatably mounted on the rear side of the central decoration 3351 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. and a second protruding decorative body 3353.

The first protruding decorative body 3352 has a pair of first protruding decorative parts 3352a formed in an isosceles triangular shape protruding long with the central decorative body 3351 side as the base. In the pair of first decorative projections 3352a, the first decorative projection 3352a on the right side of the central decorative body 3351 is arranged behind the first decorative projection 3352a on the left side in the front-rear direction. The first projecting decoration 3352 has a link attachment portion 3352c to which the tip of the right second link rod 3304 described later is rotatably attached to the tip of the right first projecting decoration 3352a.

The second projecting decorative body 3353 has a pair of second projecting decorative parts 3353a formed in the shape of a long projected isosceles triangle with the central decorative body 3351 side as the base. As for the pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a, the left second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the central decorative body 3351 is arranged behind the right second protruding decorative portion 3353a in the front-rear direction. The second projecting decoration 3353 has a link attachment portion 3353c to which the tip of the left second link rod 3304 described later is rotatably attached to the tip of the left second projecting decoration 3353a.

In the upper front movable decoration 3350, the first protruding decoration 3352a of the first protruding decoration 3352 and the second protruding decoration 3353a of the second protruding decoration 3353 are formed to have the same shape and size. there is The upper front movable decoration 3350 has the left second projecting decoration 3353a behind the left first projecting decoration 3352a, and the right first projecting decoration 3352a behind the right second projecting decoration 3353a. The first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 overlap each other in the front-rear direction.

Although not shown, the upper front movable decoration 3350 has a central decoration 3351, a pair of first projecting decorations 3352a, and a pair of second projecting decorations 3353a on the rear side, and a plurality of LEDs on the front. is mounted on the upper front center decorative board, the first protruding decorative part decorative board, and the second protruding decorative part decorative board. The second protruding decoration parts 3353a can be independently decorated with light.

In addition, the upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the unit base 3301 at symmetrical positions with respect to the center of the front surface in the left-right direction, and is rotatable around an axis extending back and forth at the base end. A pair of first link rods 3303 extending in a rod shape, and base end sides attached to respective distal ends of the pair of first link rods 3303 so as to be rotatable around axes extending back and forth, and distal end sides protruding firstly. A pair of second link rods 3304 rotatably attached to the link mounting portion 3352c of the decorative body 3352 and the link mounting portion 3353c of the second protruding decorative body 3353, respectively, around the longitudinally extending axis, and the front surface of the unit base 3301. and an upper stopper 3305 for restricting upward rotation of the tip side of the first link rod 3303, and a lower stopper 3306 for restricting downward rotation of the tip side of the first link rod 3303. ing.

Next, an effect using the upper front movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state of the upper front movable effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 99 and the like, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is raised, and the central decorative body 3351 is positioned near the left-right upper end of the game area 5a. At the same time, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 extend horizontally and overlap each other in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 116(a)). In this normal state, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 overlap each other in the front-rear direction, so that the player can recognize them as one decoration. In addition, in a normal state, the pair of first link rods 3303 are in contact with the upper stoppers 3305, respectively, and further rotation in the direction in which the tip side moves upward is prevented.

In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 As a result, the central decoration 3351 moves downward together with the first projecting decoration 3352 and the second projecting decoration 3353 and the upper front movable decoration 3350 as a whole. At this time, the first decorative projecting body 3352 and the second decorative projecting body 3353 move downward while remaining horizontally extended. By moving these first protruding decorative body 3352 and second protruding decorative body 3353 downward, the right second link rod 3304 attached to the link mounting part 3352c of the right first protruding decorative part 3352a and the left side The second link rod 3304 on the left side attached to the link mounting portion 3353c of the second projecting decorative portion 3353a moves downward, and the second link rod 3304 is attached to the tip of each of the pair of The first link rods 3303 rotate so that the tip ends thereof move downward.

When the pair of first link rods 3303 rotating with the downward movement of the upper front movable decoration 3350 (central decoration 3351) come into contact with the lower stoppers 3306, further rotation is blocked. state (see FIG. 116(b)). After the pair of first link rods 3303 abut against the lower stoppers 3306, when the central decorative body 3351 further moves downward, the right first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the left second protruding decorative portion 3353a Since downward movement is restricted by the left and right second link rods 3304, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are positioned at the center of the first connecting rod 3352b and second connecting rod 3353b ( The center of the central decoration 3351) rotates in the direction in which the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the side opposite to the side on which the second link rod 3304 is attached move downward. (See FIG. 116(c)). As a result, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a arranged on both left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 rotate around the central decorative body 3351 so as to open the scissors. The entire upper front movable decorative body 3350 can be enlarged to surprise the player and suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Thus, according to the upper front movable effect unit 3300, in the normal state, the first projecting decoration 3352 and the second projecting decoration 3353 of the upper front movable decoration 3350 are overlapped in the front and rear to form one decoration. When the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is lowered, the overlapping first protruding decorative portion 3352a and second protruding decorative portion 3353a are rotated and opened so that the tips are separated from each other. A player who recognizes it as one decoration can be surprised, and the movement of the upper front movable decoration 3350 can be enjoyed.

In addition, by the action of the first link rod 3303 and the second link rod 3304, the first projecting decoration 3352 and the second projecting decoration 3353 can be moved to the center decoration 3351 simply by moving the upper front movable decoration 3350 downward. , so that it is not necessary to separately provide a drive motor for rotating the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353. As shown in FIG.

[6. control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays an effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control part 1511. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the . The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game includes a ROM (main control built-in ROM) that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM (main control built-in RAM) that temporarily stores data. ), etc., a main control MPU, which is a microprocessor, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), and a main control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches are input. , a main control solenoid drive circuit for driving various solenoids, and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first start opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002, and a second start opening that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004. An opening sensor 2511, a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2301 for detecting the game ball B passing through the gate section 2003, and a first big winning opening 2005. A first big winning hole sensor 2512 for detecting the game ball B, a second big winning hole sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2006, and a fraudulent magnetism in the game area 5a. Detection signals from the magnetic sensors 3003 and the like are input through the main control I/O ports.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby controlling the starting solenoid 2514, the first attacker solenoid 2515, and the second attacker solenoid. 2516, the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port, the normal pattern display, the normal reservation display, the first special pattern display, the first special reservation number display, A drive signal is output to the second special symbol display, the second special reserved number display, the round display, and the like.

In this embodiment, the first starter sensor 3002, the second starter sensor 2511, the gate sensor 2301, the first grand prize sensor 2512, and the second grand prize winner sensor 2513 are provided with non-contact type electromagnetic sensors. A contact-type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001, whereas a proximity switch of the type is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so that the first starting hole sensor 3002 and the second starting hole sensor 2511 , and the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2301 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starter sensor 3002, the second starter sensor 2511, and the gate sensor 2301. FIG.

In addition, when an advantageous game state (such as a "jackpot" game) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is opened and the game ball B enters frequently. , The detection of the game ball B by the first big winning hole sensor 2512 and the second big winning hole sensor 2513 also occurs frequently. For this reason, the proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the first big winning slot sensor 2512 and the second big winning slot sensor 2513 as well. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001 .

In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. In addition, the main control MPU, which will be described later in detail, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 , shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, although detailed description will be given later. A power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when power is cut off. described.). This capacitor allows the main control MPU to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633 .

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This blackout warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
A payout control board 633 that controls the payout of game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a launching control unit that performs shooting control by a shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by a ball feeding solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED indicator for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball tank 552 and a tank rail during maintenance. 553, a ball guide unit 570, and a ball extraction switch for discharging the game ball B in the payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) to start the ball extraction operation.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 633, is a microcontroller that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. The payout control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM as well as functions for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) on the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball cut detection sensor 574, payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is inputted to the payout control input circuit and inputted to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. , Output to the error LED indicator via the payout control I / O port, and send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Also, the number of game balls B actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

An error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 633), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is cut Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it informs that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball is caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has malfunctioned based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it informs that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). Notifies that when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (that the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a return requesting signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner. is entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the residual of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a residual display signal to the ball rental operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display section of the operation unit 220 .

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The shooting control unit 633b performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for firing the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182, and detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. A detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182, is input to a launch solenoid drive circuit.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this firing solenoid drive circuit applies a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launching strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. Triggered by the input, it outputs to the firing solenoid 542 . On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feed reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to One ball of B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side by stopping the output of the constant current. send. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

In addition, the power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 has a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. Due to this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
Peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control in the peripheral control board 1510, includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

Also, the peripheral control unit 1511 may further include a peripheral control RAM. The peripheral control RAM stores various information (such as schedule data defining a screen drawn on the effect display device 1600 and various information for managing schedule data that defines the light emission mode of LEDs, etc.).

The peripheral control MPU incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decoration board of the game board 5 The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED etc. is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to each decoration board of the game board 5. , game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for actuating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive motor of the game board 5 or Door-side drive data for sending to the drive solenoid or for outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, etc., and each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 door-side drive light-emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED, etc. provided in the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board. to the door frame 3 side, and control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. , and outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting positions in the lower movable production unit 3100, the upper rear movable production unit 3200, and the upper front movable production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are sent to the peripheral control MPU. is entered in Further, the detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the rise detection sensor 376a, the descent detection sensor 382, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are controlled by peripheral control. input to the MPU.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 that indicates that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally. monitoring the action.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and uses the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, and the top side Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects are played from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU. It diagnoses whether or not its own system is running out of control by using it together with WDT.

A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input/output port. k) Bps (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting and blinking command, the game board side lighting and blinking command, the movable body driving command, etc., which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the performance drive board of the game board 5, are multiple serial input commands different from the display commands. This is performed by the output port, and 250 kbps is set as the bit rate in this embodiment.

The effect driving board outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting blinking command to the LED of each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, or based on the received game board side lighting blinking command A lighting signal or blinking signal is output to the LED of each decoration board provided on the game board 5 .

In addition, the performance drive board transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button elevation drive motor 367 provided on the door frame 3, each drive motor provided on the game board 5, and the like. output to

[6-3b. Effect display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600 . Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to render the effect display device 1600 . are controlling. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to that effect. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores not only various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, but also control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, the control data (display commands) and A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The non-resident area transfer data defines in advance the order of transferring various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP. It extracts from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. Thus, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600 . Also, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. Note that the VDP employs a line buffer system. The "line buffer method" is to hold one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 in a line buffer, and transfer the one line of drawing data held in this line buffer to the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored and affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600 . Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. The sprite data is base data, which is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

A “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600 . For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites are superimposed (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order").

A sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". A small sprite can be expressed using one sprite character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters, for example, arranged horizontally by 2×vertically 3. can be expressed. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats the main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front and the main scanning in the direction crossing the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially scans one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. are output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, respectively.

[7. Game content]
Game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 100 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, whereby game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 are played. is hit into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game balls B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more the handle 182 is rotated clockwise, the more strongly the game balls B can be hit. , that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Also, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstructing nail N, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball B abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails N, The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down. When the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2501 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2502 to the stage 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 to move left and right, and is released forward from the center in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted by the first start hole 2002 with a high probability because the part is located right above the first start hole 2002. - 特許庁When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 or the general winning opening 2001 .

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the side unit 2200 and the obstacle nail N will pull it toward the center in the left-right direction, and will enter the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Alternatively, there is a possibility that it will be accepted in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the general prize winning port 2001, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right-handed hitting). , is discharged to the upper part of the gate unit 2300 through the right side of the center accessory 2500 . In addition to the gate portion 2003 of the gate unit 2300, this part is provided with the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500 and the general prize winning opening 2001, and the gate portion 2003 is passed with a certain probability.

Then, when the right-handed game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result of the normal lottery is "normal hit", the closed second start opening. 2004 will be in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 will be possible. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game ball B from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, to the upper tray 201. paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0 .01-60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 before the normal lottery result is indicated after the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the ordinary lottery result ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of retained lottery results is set to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being retained. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received by the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot", A special lottery result will be drawn to generate "middle hit", "small hit", "probability variation (probability fluctuation) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit".Then, the special lottery results that have been drawn, Predetermined time (for example, 0.1 ~ 360 seconds, also referred to as special fluctuation time) suggested to the player.In addition, the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 lottery The special lottery results include "loss", "small hit", "2R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "15R jackpot", "probability variation (probability fluctuation) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", " There are "probable short time hit", "probable short time hit", etc.

The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is the special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 will be in a state in which the game ball B can be received in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 when the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 by . Therefore, when the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 can accept the game ball B, by allowing the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 to accept the game ball B, game ball B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

If the special lottery result is a "small hit", the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is held for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The open/close pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice) in such a manner as to close after reaching an open state capable of accepting . On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "jackpot", the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) after the game ball B can be received. When any of the conditions of the progress or the acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B into the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is satisfied, the game ball B cannot be accepted. The opening/closing pattern for the closed state (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the end of the big win game, change the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn ("variable hit"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. There is a "hit" to do ("time saving hit").

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the special lottery result drawn is suggested, the first start port 2002 and Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball B is accepted in the second start port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. Reserved. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, it is discarded without holding the special lottery result. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 . The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to flash for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. A performance image suggesting a special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 is a pattern row displayed in a state in which three pattern rows made up of a plurality of patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction and each pattern row is varied. are sequentially stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are in a combination corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than "lost", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a small winning game, a big winning game, etc.) occurs according to the special lottery result.

Note that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image does not appear). time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is operated according to the special lottery result. A player-participation type effect can be performed in which the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player participation type performance, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate the rotary operation unit 302, vibrate it, assist the rotary operation, or inhibit the rotary operation, and the operation button elevation drive motor By 367, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised to make it stand out, and the operation of the production operation section 301 can entertain the player participation type production.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided on the door frame 3, each decoration board provided on the game board 5, the display effect unit 2600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the upper rear By appropriately using the movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc., it is possible to perform light emission effects, movable effects, etc., and various effects can also entertain the player, allowing the player to enjoy the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to allow the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in performing the operation to be performed or does not perform the operation in the player participation type presentation in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated. to notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is requested, the pressing operation of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b or the rotation operation of the rotating operation portion 302 causes the vibration speaker 354 to vibrate. The effect display device 1600 is made to display that effect.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the display effect unit of the front unit 2000 on the game board 5 is displayed according to the special lottery result. 2600, the lower movable production unit 3100, the upper rear movable production unit 3200, the upper front movable production unit 3300, etc. of the back unit 3000 can be used as appropriate to perform light emission production, movable production, display production, etc. The player can be entertained by various presentations, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[8. Various control processing of the main control board]
[8-1. Main control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program, thereby executing the main control side power-on process. FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing the procedure of main control side power-on processing.

When the main-control-side power-on process is started, the main control MPU first executes an initialization process (step S202). In the initialization process, the execution conditions for the interrupt process are set, and the data to be stored in the main control built-in RAM is set according to the startup state of the pachinko machine 1 .

For example, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure, when the power is restored, the data stored in the main control built-in RAM is restored based on the game information backed up in order to restore the state before the power was interrupted. On the other hand, when the game machine is turned on when the hall is opened (when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated), RAM clear processing for initializing the main control built-in RAM is executed.

When the initialization process ends, the main control MPU first determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been detected (step S208). The power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning when the voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, power outage or momentary power outage and the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power outage warning voltage.

When the power failure warning signal is not detected (the result of step S208 is "No"), the main control MPU executes a non-hit-lose random number update process (step S218). In the non-hit-lose random number update process, the random numbers irrelevant to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination) are updated. The non-win/lose random numbers include, for example, reach determination random numbers, variable display pattern random numbers, big hit symbol initial value determination random numbers, and small winning symbol initial value determination random numbers. After that, the non-hit-lose random number update process is continuously executed until the power failure warning signal is detected.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU detects the power failure warning signal, the main control MPU executes main control side power-off processing for protecting the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM (step S219). In the main control side power-off process, first, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited to prevent writing to the main control built-in RAM and protect game information from being rewritten. Furthermore, the drive signal output to the starter solenoid 2514, the function display unit 1400, etc. is stopped, a checksum is calculated for judging the validity of the game information at the time of power failure recovery, and a backup flag is set.

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the power is restored after that, the main control side power-on processing is executed, and the game protected by the main control side power-off processing. Restore to the state before the power failure based on the information.

[8-2. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. The main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed for each interrupt period (eg, 4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing (FIG. 118).

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU clears the interrupt flag (step S72). The interrupt period is initialized by clearing the interrupt flag, and the next interrupt period is clocked from the initial value.

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the main control I/O ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. For example, the detection signal from the first big winning hole sensor 2512 that detects the game ball B that has entered the first big winning hole 2005, the second big winning that detects the game ball B that has entered the second big winning hole 2006 A detection signal from the opening sensor 2513, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B entering the first starting opening 2002, and a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B entering the second starting opening 2004. A detection signal from the secondary start sensor 2511, a detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet, and a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later are read, and input information is input information. Store in storage area.

Subsequently, the main control MPU performs timer update processing for managing time by subtracting the timer interrupt period (4 ms) from the set measurement time until it becomes 0 (step S76). The measurement time in the timer update process includes, for example, the special symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric role product control process described later, and the normal symbol and normal electric role product control process described later. Payout control board 633 normally receives various commands sent by main control board 1310 (main control MPU) in addition to the normal symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. There is a time until a signal is input (ACK signal input determination time) and the like.

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes win/lose random number update processing (step S78). In the hit/lose random number update process, the big hit determination random number, the big hit design random number, and the small hit design random number are updated.

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created, and a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is created. . Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball B enters the first big winning hole 2005, a prize ball command for paying out ten prize balls is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633, or payout control of the prize ball command is performed. When the payer ACK signal notifying that the board 633 has completed reception normally is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is created and payout is made. It is transmitted to the control board 633 .

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes frame command reception processing (step S82). Frame command reception processing receives various commands output from the payout control board 633 .

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes fraud detection processing (step S84). In the fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the detection signal from the first big winning hole sensor 2512 is input when it is not in the jackpot game state (the game ball enters the first big winning hole 2005 ), or when a detection signal from the second big winning hole sensor 2513 is input (when a game ball enters the second big winning hole 2006), etc., a winning abnormal display command is issued as an abnormal state. create.

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether or not the random number for big hit determination matches the big hit determination value ("special lottery"), and whether or not the random number for big hit symbol matches the probability variation determination value. (determine whether or not to generate probability fluctuation). Here, "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of hitting a big hit changes to a high probability (probability variable time) set higher than the normal time (low probability). Details of the special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control processing (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2301 is input to the input terminal of the main control I/O port, a normal symbol per judgment random number or the like is extracted. Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value (“normal lottery”). Whether or not the second starting port 2004 is to be opened is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). By opening the second starting port 2004, a game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004, and the game state is advantageous to the player.

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes port output processing (step S90). In the port output process, various signals are output from the output terminals of the main control I/O ports of the main control MPU. The main control program, for example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 633 has been successfully received, the main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 633 output, and when in a jackpot game state, output a drive signal to a first attacker solenoid 2515 for opening and closing the first big winning opening 2005 and a second attacker solenoid 2516 for opening and closing the second big winning opening 2006; In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the starting port 2004, a 15 round big win information output signal, a 5 round big win information output signal, a 2 round big win information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as the pattern display information output signal, the normal pattern display information output signal, the time saving information output information, and the start winning prize information output signal are output to the payout control board 633.

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. The transmission information includes commands for instructing execution of effects by the effect display device 1600, movable bodies, etc., commands for notifying the game state, occurrence of errors, and the like.

Finally, the main control MPU executes register switching (recovery) (step S96), and terminates the main control side timer interrupt processing. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU saves the contents of the general-purpose register to the stack area by means of hardware. This prevents the contents of general-purpose registers used in main processing on the main control side from being destroyed. In the process of step S96, the contents saved in the stack area are read and written to the original register. Note that the main control MPU sets interrupt permission after the process of step S96.

[8-3. Special pattern and special electric accessories control process]
Next, the special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing will be described. FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process procedure. The special symbol and special electric accessary product control process is executed in the process of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are also collectively referred to as starting ports. Also, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are collectively referred to as the big prize opening. In addition, the first special design and the second special design are generically called special design.

In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, the acceptance of the game ball into the starting port, that is, the start winning prize (satisfaction of the starting condition), the big hit for each starting memory information (starting information) in which the starting condition is satisfied. A determination random number is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the big hit determination random number matches a big hit determination value preliminarily stored in a main control built-in ROM (lottery means). Then, it is determined whether or not to generate a big win game state based on the lottery result. A game state is shifted to a jackpot game state. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing will be described along the flowchart shown in FIG.

When the special symbol and special electric role product control process is started, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first determines whether or not the game ball B has won the big winning opening (step S100). When the game ball B wins the big winning hole (the result of step S100 is "yes"), a big winning hole winning designation command is set (step S102).

Subsequently, the main control MPU determines whether or not a game ball has entered the starting hole (step S112). Then, whether or not the game ball has won the starting hole is detected by the first starting hole sensor 3002 or the second starting hole sensor 2511 in the switch input process (step S74) in the main control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 119). This is done based on the input information stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM by reading the presence or absence of the signal.

The main control MPU, when the game ball has won the starting hole (the result of step S114 is "yes"), executes the starting hole winning process (step S116). In the start-up win-time process, a start-up win-win command to be transmitted when a game ball newly wins in the start-up win is set, a random number for judging a big hit is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, and a special pattern is set. It also executes processing and the like for executing the look-ahead effect.

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes corresponding processing based on the special symbol/electric accessary product operation number, which is a game progress state variable specifying the type of branch processing executed according to the progress of the game (step S124). The game progress state variables are stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and are updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process proceeds to a branching process designated based on the value of the game progressing state variable stored in the game progressing state storage area. End the process. Since the values of the game progress state variables and the like stored in the game progress state storage area are game information, they are backed up in the main control side power failure process.

In the processing of step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, as branch processing, special symbol variation waiting processing (step S130), special symbol variation in-process (step S132), special symbol big hit determination processing (step S134), Special symbol deviation stop processing (step S136), special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), interval processing before large winning opening opening (step S140), large winning opening opening processing (step S142), large winning opening closing process (step S144) or a special winning opening end interval process (step S146) is executed.

In the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), when the game ball B enters the starting hole, the special symbol display device starts to display the variation of the special symbol.

In the special symbol fluctuation process (step S132), a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol and the like are performed. In the special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), it is determined whether or not the fixed and stopped special symbol generates a big win game state based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole.

In the special symbol deviation stop process (step S136), when the big hit game state is not generated, the process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol and notifying the fact is performed. In the special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), when a jackpot game state is to be generated, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbols and notifying that effect is performed.

In the interval process before opening the big winning opening (step S140), a process for generating a big win game state and notifying that a big win operation is started is performed. In the big winning opening opening process (step S142), a process related to a big winning operation for making it easier for a game ball to enter each big winning opening is performed by opening the big winning opening.

In the big winning opening closing process (step S144), by closing the big winning opening from the open state, a process related to the big winning operation to make it difficult for the game ball to enter each big winning opening is performed. In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the jackpot operation is over, a process of notifying that effect is performed.

[8-4. Special symbol variation waiting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process will be described. FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation waiting process. The special symbol variation waiting process is executed in a state where the special symbol variation display is not performed, and when the variation display is suspended, preparations are made to start the special symbol variation display.

The main control MPU first determines whether or not the special symbol variation is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of special symbol operation pending balls is not zero. In addition, the number of special symbol operation pending balls is stored for each starting port when a plurality of starting ports are provided. When the variation of the special symbol is not suspended (the result of step S420 is "no"), the variation display of the special symbol is not started, so this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended (the result of step S420 is "yes"), the main control MPU sets a pending ball number designation command as command data (step S438).

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes a special symbol/flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol/flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on the random number for judging the big hit acquired at the time of winning the starting game.

Furthermore, the main control MPU executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main control MPU creates a variation pattern command for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 . Specifically, first, as the command value, the upper byte of the special figure variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set (step S452). Further, the variation pattern value stored in the variation pattern area is set as lower command data (step S458). Furthermore, the variation type classification value is acquired from the variation type classification area (step S460), and the upper byte of the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation type is obtained by adding the variation type classification value to the command value set in step S452. is calculated (step S462). The command data of the variation pattern command thus created is stored in a predetermined area.

Subsequently, the main control MPU sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S466). Further, the change state designation command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

Each command created by the above processing is set in the command buffer. The reserved ball number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[8-5. Special symbol variation pattern setting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting the variation pattern in the special symbol variation display. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

The main control MPU first acquires the number of special symbol operation pending balls (step S530). The number of special symbol operation pending balls is stored in the special symbol operation pending ball number buffer. Furthermore, the main control MPU sets a jackpot flag from the jackpot flag area (step S538).

Then, the main control MPU executes a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a special symbol variation pattern based on the number of special symbol operation pending balls and the big hit flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main control MPU acquires the variation pattern value extracted by the variation pattern selection determination process (step S544). Then, data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value is retrieved from the special symbol variation time data (step S546).

Furthermore, the main control MPU executes a variation type determination process for selecting the variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbols (step S548). The variation type classification value acquired by the variation type determination process is set (step S550).

Subsequently, the main control MPU searches the variable time added value data corresponding to the variable type type value from the variable time added value data (step S552). The variation time addition value is the addition time corresponding to the variation type, and corresponds to, for example, the addition time according to the number of times of pseudo consecutive. Then, the main control MPU adds the variable time added value retrieved in the process of step S552 to the standard variable time value retrieved in the process of step S546 to obtain the final variable time (step S554). . Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol/electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process is terminated.

[8-6. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment processing]
Next, details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S542) will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of variation pattern selection determination processing. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of special symbols.

The main control MPU first acquires the variation information source table based on the variation table number (step S340). The variation table number is a value for selecting (obtaining) a variation information source table from the variation information source address table. The variation information source table includes hit (hit variation selection information state table), loss (loss variation selection information state table), reach (reach variation selection information state table), reach probability (special symbol reach probability table) and variation type (variation type determination data table) are stored in table information.

Subsequently, the main control MPU acquires a hit determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). It is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the jackpot value (step S350). When a big win is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), a big win flag and a big win symbol type are obtained (step S354).

Next, the main control MPU executes variation information number search processing based on the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, the variation information number for determining the hit time variation pattern selection value data table is acquired from the jackpot variation selection information type table. The main control MPU acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the big hit variation selection information type table based on the acquired variation information number (step S360).

On the other hand, when the main control MPU does not win a big win or a small win (the result of step S350 is "no"), the main control MPU determines whether or not to generate reach in the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S372).

When the main control MPU does not generate a reach in the variation display (the result of step S372 is "no"), the main control MPU acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the lost variation selection information retention table based on the number of retained balls (step S376).

On the other hand, when the main control MPU generates a reach in the variable display (the result of step S372 is "yes"), based on the state flag, the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern is obtained from the reach fluctuation selection information state table. (Step S382).

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes the variation information number search process based on the variation pattern random number 1 acquired in the process of step S360, step S378 or step S382 (step S388). Then, the variation pattern selection value data table is acquired by the variation information number search process, and the variation pattern random number 2 is acquired from the variation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Furthermore, based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table, variation information number search processing is executed (step S394). A variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and this process ends.

In the present embodiment, a variation pattern is selected in two steps using two types of random numbers, a variation pattern random number 1 (step S386) and a variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, based on the variation pattern random number 1, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern group such as ○○ system reach) is selected. Further, a variation pattern (a value set in a variation pattern command) to be finally displayed in a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2 . It should be noted that the method is not limited to the method of drawing lots in two stages, and a method of drawing lots in three or more stages may be used, or a variation pattern may be directly selected using one variation pattern random number.

[9. Various control processing of the peripheral control board]
Next, processing of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. FIG. FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing an example of a process performed when the power of the peripheral controller is turned on. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral controller timer interrupt processing.

[9-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 executes a performance control program to perform processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the peripheral control MPU executes an initial setting process (step S1000). In the initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a hot start/cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after resetting, and the like are performed.

The peripheral control MPU first performs processing to initialize itself, but the time required for the processing to initialize the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU can be initialized in an extremely short time. can be done. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the command related to the control of the game effect and the pachinko game output from the main control board 1310 are output. Various commands such as commands relating to the state of the machine 1 can be received. Also, in the initial setting process, the image RAM is initialized by writing, for example, "0" into the storage area of the image RAM.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In the current time information acquisition process, for example, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC held by the peripheral control unit 1511, and the current calendar information is stored in the peripheral control RAM. and set as current time information.

The peripheral control MPU sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0 (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. Each is set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral controller V-blank signal that is executed when a V-blank signal is input from the VDP to indicate that the screen data from the display control MPU can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in interrupt processing.

The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such determinations, a standby state is established until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is to be executed (the result of step S1008 is "YES"), the peripheral control MPU first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. is set to 1 (step S1009). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In the interrupt timer start processing, an interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the interrupt timer is started to count the number of times the peripheral control unit timer interrupt processing is executed. The timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized by setting the value 1 to the interrupt execution count STN. This timer interrupt execution count STN is updated in the peripheral controller timer interrupt processing (FIG. 125).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes operation unit monitoring processing (step S1012). In the operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 or the like, the presence or absence of operation of each operation means is monitored. , appropriately determines whether or not to be reflected in the game performance.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes lamp data output processing (step S1014). In the lamp data output process, for example, a game board for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, which is created by the lamp data creation process. Output side emission data.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes display data output processing (step S1016). In the display data output process, drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the image RAM in the display data creation process is output to the effect display device 1600 .

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs the music and sound effects created in the sound data creation process, and the sound data such as notification sound and announcement sound as serialized audio data to the sound source IC.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes scheduler update processing (step S1020). In the scheduler update process, schedule data that instructs the timing of outputting screen data, light emission data, sound data, drive data for movable bodies, etc., is updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, the display control MPU instructs which screen data to output to the VDP from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation. to update the pointer.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes received command analysis processing (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, the peripheral control MPU analyzes (command analysis means) various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 and received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command reception means). The peripheral control MPU recognizes the game state according to the analysis result of the received command and executes the corresponding effect.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes warning processing (step S1024). In the warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified as notification displays, screen generation schedule data and lighting mode generation for executing various abnormality notifications are performed. schedule data for sound generation, schedule data for electric driving source, etc. are set. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

Next, the peripheral control MPU executes RTC acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In the RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 are updated. The RTC acquisition information update process updates the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, and also updates the year, month, day, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In the lamp data creation process, game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards is created.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes display data creation processing (step S1030). In the display data creation process, screen data to be output to the effect display device 1600 is created. The peripheral control unit MPU transmits control data (display command) corresponding to the effect to be executed to the display control MPU, and the display control MPU analyzes the control data (display command). Further, the display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control MPU from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. When the screen data is input, the VDP extracts at least one sprite character from the image ROM based on the input screen data, creates sprite data from the extracted at least one sprite character, and displays the effect display device 1600. 1 screen (1 frame) of drawing data to be displayed on the image RAM (corresponding to a line buffer) is generated.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the sound ROM are extracted, and the built-in sound source is controlled to reproduce the music and sound effects according to the track numbers specified in the sound command data. Incorporate sound data and set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes backup processing (step S1034). In the backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied to the backup area and backed up.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes WDT clear processing (step S1036). In the WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the built-in WDT and the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Finally, the peripheral control MPU sets the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG as completion of the execution of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit (step S1038), and returns to the processing of step S1006 again. Then, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is executed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms). ÷30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[9-2. Peripheral control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed each time an interrupt timer is generated by activating the interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller regular processing of the peripheral controller power-on processing in FIG. 12542, will be described. Note that the peripheral controller timer interrupt processing is performed every (interval at which the V blank signal is input)/n [ms] (n is a natural number). In the present embodiment, it is assumed that n=32, that is, the peripheral controller timer interrupt processing is performed approximately every 1.04 ms.

When the peripheral controller timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral controller MPU first determines whether or not the timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 (step S1100). The timer interrupt execution count STN is the number of times the interrupt timer is started in the interrupt timer start processing (step S1010) of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (FIG. 124) and the peripheral control unit timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed. It is a counter that counts. In the present embodiment, as described above, the peripheral controller steady process is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms. is started, the peripheral control unit timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times before the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed.

If the timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100 (result of step S1100 is "NO"), that is, if the 33rd timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller timer interrupt processing is started, , the peripheral control MPU ends the peripheral control unit timer interrupt processing.

On the other hand, if the timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 (result of step S1100 is "YES"), the peripheral control MPU adds 1 to the timer interrupt execution count STN (step S1102). By adding 1 to the timer interrupt execution count STN, the number of times the interrupt timer was started in the interrupt timer start processing (step S1010) of the peripheral control unit power-on processing and the peripheral control unit timer interrupt processing was executed is 1. It will be increased by the number of times.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes movable body information acquisition processing (step S1104). In the movable object information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided on the game board 5 are input, thereby obtaining history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, original position history information, movable position information, etc.). history information, etc.). From the created history information, the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be obtained.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1106). In the operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, central pressing operation section 303a and operation history information of the outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b). From this history information, it is possible to acquire whether or not the central pressing operation portion 303a and the peripheral pressing operation portion 303b have been operated.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes motor and solenoid drive processing (step S1108). In the motor and solenoid drive process, the game board decoration drive board, the frame decoration drive board, and the performance drive are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order. It drives an electrical drive source such as a substrate motor or solenoid.

Finally, the peripheral control MPU executes drawing state acquisition processing (S1110). Furthermore, backup processing is executed (step S1112), and this processing ends. In the backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the externally attached peripheral control RAM are copied to the backup area and backed up.

As described above, in the peripheral controller timer interrupt process, the effect is advanced by executing various processes related to the effect in steps S1104 to S1108 in a period of about 1.04 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process, the effect is advanced by executing various processes related to the effect in steps S1012 to S1032 in a period of about 33.3 ms. Further, as described above, by counting the timer interrupt execution count STN while the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed once, the peripheral control unit timer interrupt processing is controlled so as not to be executed more than 33 times. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

The peripheral control MPU acquires game-related information (special lottery results, current progress of the game, etc.) from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) while such processing is progressing. Based on the information obtained, various effects are controlled. Controls related to these effects include, in the effect display device 1600, making the effect pattern appear according to the fluctuation time determined by the main control board 1310, making a special effect image appear during the jackpot game, and the like. In addition, including the effect display device 1600, any of the various decorations arranged on the game board 5 (or a plurality of appropriate decorations) can be moved, or any of these decorations ( Alternatively, it also includes emitting light from a plurality of appropriate decorations.

In addition, when the game area 5a is provided with a plurality of effect display devices 1600, the peripheral control MPU and the display control MPU according to this embodiment, as one of the controls related to various effects, the plurality of effect display devices In 1600, it is possible to perform control to cause a specific effect image to appear across the display surfaces of each effect display device 1600, or to perform control to cause different effect images to appear on the two display surfaces. .

In addition, the peripheral control MPU according to this embodiment, as one of the controls related to various effects, executes the above-mentioned specific movable effect, and during the period when the specific movable effect is performed, various decorations The upper front movable decorative body 3350, which is one of them, can be made to emit light.

Also, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 may be provided integrally with the liquid crystal display device 3600 .

[10. Operation determination processing in various pressing operation units]
An example of operation determination processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 130. FIG. An example of the pressing operation determination process when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed will be described below. may be applied to processing.

[10-1. Work area for storing detection flags]
FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of transition of bit strings in the work area of the peripheral control RAM that holds the detection history of the pressure detection sensor 381. In FIG. A work area 1261 is a 32-bit work area secured in the peripheral control RAM, and holds detection history by the pressure detection sensor 381 .

The peripheral control MPU secures a work area 1261 in the peripheral control RAM, for example, in the initial step S1106 in the initial peripheral control unit steady process or before the initial step S1106. Note that the initial value of the bit string in the work area 1261 is, for example, a state in which all bits of the bit string are 0. Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the term "period" simply indicates the period (approximately 1.04 ms in the present embodiment) at which timer interrupt processing is performed. Further, hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the "frame period" indicates the input interval of the V blank signal, that is, the period of updating one frame image (approximately 33.3 ms in this embodiment). do.

In step S1106, the peripheral control MPU acquires detection information from the pressure detection sensor 381 and generates a detection flag indicating whether or not a pressure has been detected. In other words, the peripheral control MPU obtains detection information by the pressure detection sensor 381 every cycle and generates a pressure detection flag. Note that when the detection flag is ON, it indicates that the press has been detected, and when the detection flag is OFF, it indicates that the press has not been detected.

Furthermore, in step S1106, the peripheral control MPU, for example, shifts the bit string of the work area 1261 to the right by one bit, and stores the generated detection flag in the first bit from the left. In other words, the work area 1261 holds the detection history of the pressure detection sensor 381 in each period of the most recent 32 periods (approximately 33.3 ms). Therefore, the work area 1261 holds all the detection histories of the pressure detection sensor 381 in the most recent frame at the time of frame update.

Also, the detection histories in each bit of the work area 1261 are arranged from the left in ascending order. Note that the work area 1261 may be configured such that the detection history for each bit is arranged from the right in ascending order.

An example of transition of bit strings in the work area 1261 in FIG. 126 will be described. First, the work area 1261 holds initial values. Since a pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 in the first cycle of F1 (first frame), in the bit string of the work area 1261 in the first cycle of F1, 1 is stored in the first bit from the left, and 1 is stored in the other bits. 0 is stored.

Subsequently, pressure was detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 in the second cycle of F1 and the third cycle of F1, and thereafter, the pressure was not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 in F1. Therefore, in the bit string of the work area 1261 at the end of F1 (updating the frame), 1 is stored in the 1st bit from the right, the 2nd bit from the right, and the 3rd bit from the right, and 0 is stored in the other bits. It is A work area 1261 at the end of F1 shows the detection history in the entire F1.

Subsequently, since a pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 in the first period of F2 (the frame following F1), in the bit string of the work area 1261 in the first period of F2, the first bit from the left and the first bit from the right 1 is stored in the second bit and the second bit from the right, and 0 is stored in the other bits. In the bit string of the work area 1261 in the first period of F2, the first bit from the left indicates the detection history in F2, and the other bits indicate the detection history in F1.

Subsequently, since a pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 in the second period of F2, in the bit string of the work area 1261 in the second period of F2, the 1st bit from the left, the 2nd bit from the left, and the 1st bit from the right. 1 is stored in the first bit and 0 is stored in the other bits. In the bit string of the work area 1261 in the second cycle of F2, the first bit from the left and the second bit from the right indicate the detection history in F2, and the other bits indicate the detection history in F1.

Although details will be described later, the peripheral control MPU refers to the work area 1261 after the end of the most recent frame and before acquiring the detection history of the first cycle of the next frame of the most recent frame (for example, step S1012 of the next frame). Then, operation determination is performed to determine whether or not the central pressing operation portion 303a has been pressed in the most recent frame.

The length of the bit string in the work area 1261 in this embodiment is the minimum length that can store all the detection histories of the pressure detection sensor 381 in one frame, that is, the total number of cycles in one frame ((frame cycle)/(cycle) ), the same 32 bits as Since the bit string of the work area 1261 is 32 bits, the peripheral control MPU can use the detection history in the latest frame without omission in the operation determination. The bit string length of the work area 1261 may be 33 bits or more, but from the viewpoint of saving the memory capacity of the peripheral control RAM, the bit string length of the work area 1261 is preferably 32 bits. .

When the bit string of the work area 1261 is 32 bits, the work area 1261 after the end of the most recent frame and before acquisition of the detection history of the first cycle of the next frame of the most recent frame is only the detection history of the entire most recent frame by the pressure detection sensor 381. hold. At this time, the peripheral control MPU refers to all bit strings in the work area and executes pressure determination in the most recent frame.

On the other hand, if the bit string of the work area 1261 is 33 bits or more, the peripheral control MPU, for example, refers only to the 32 bits from the left of the work area 1261 (that is, the detection history of the most recent frame) to determine the operation in the most recent frame. to run. Even if the bit string of the work area 1261 is 33 bits or more, the peripheral control MPU can refer to all the bits of the bit string of the work area 1261 by resetting the work area 1261 to the initial value after executing the operation determination. , the pressure determination in the most recent frame can be executed.

Therefore, also from the viewpoint of reducing the amount of processing, it is desirable that the length of the bit string in the work area 1261 is 32 bits, that is, a length that can store all the detection histories of the pressure detection sensor 381 in one frame.

[10-2. Pressing Operation Determination Processing Using One Pressing Detection Sensor]
FIG. 127A is a timing chart showing an example of pressing operation determination processing in F1 to F3 (F3 is the next frame after F2). FIG. 127A is an example in which the pressure detection sensor 381 detects continuous pressure for three cycles or more in F1.

In step S1012 in each frame, the peripheral control MPU executes operation determination to determine whether or not the pressure detection sensor 381 has detected pressure continuously for three cycles or more in the most recent frame. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control MPU searches the bit string in the work area 1261 to determine whether or not the bit string "111" is included. Note that the condition of 3 cycles or more for the determination may be a condition of n cycles or more (n is an integer of 2 or more and less than the total number of cycles of one frame (32 in this embodiment)).

Note that the smaller n is, the more erroneous determination results are determined to be due to the player's operation due to chattering, noise, etc. On the other hand, the player's operation is performed even if there is detection by the pressure detection sensor. Reduces the number of erroneous judgment results. Similarly, the larger n is, the less the number of erroneous determination results that determine that erroneous detection due to chattering, noise, etc., is due to the operation by the player. The number of erroneous judgment results that are judged to be unsupported increases. However, it is highly unlikely that erroneous detection due to noise or chattering will occur continuously for three cycles (approximately 3.12 ms) or more, so n is preferably 3 or more. Furthermore, under the condition that n is 3 or more, n is set to 3 in this embodiment in order to reduce erroneous determination results that the player has not performed an operation even if there is detection by the pressure detection sensor. .

When the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string "111" is included, it sets the operation determination flag to ON. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string "111" is not included, it sets the operation determination flag to OFF. When the operation determination flag is ON, it indicates that the central pressing operation portion 303a was pressed while the pressing operation portion was in the lowered position in the most recent frame. When the operation determination flag is OFF, it indicates that the pressing operation part was not in the lowered position in the most recent frame, or that the central pressing operation part 303a was not pressed even if the pressing operation part was in the lowered position.

Note that when the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON and the central pressing operation unit 303a is in an active state, a predetermined button effect may be executed. The button effects include, for example, display of a predetermined image on the effect display device 1600, output of predetermined sounds from various speakers, light emission of predetermined patterns from various LEDs, operation (vibration, etc.) of each operation unit, and the like. include. It should be noted that the operation states of various operation units are set to the operation enabled state, for example, in step S1012 for the first time.

Note that when the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON, the central pressing operation unit 303a is in an operation valid state, and an operation instruction rendering has occurred in the most recent frame, the peripheral control MPU In steps S1028 to S1032 and the like of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the frame, preparations are made to execute the operation corresponding effect instead of or in addition to the button effect. The peripheral control MPU executes an operation-corresponding effect in steps S1014 to S1018 of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the frame after completion of preparation for execution of the operation-corresponding effect. In this embodiment, the preparation for execution of the operation effect is completed in one frame, but the preparation for execution of the operation corresponding effect and the operation corresponding effect may be executed over a plurality of frames.

Note that the operation instruction effect is an effect prompting the player to operate the effect operation unit 300. For example, the effect display device 1600 displays a message such as "press the center button!" The operation corresponding effect is a effect that occurs when the player operates the effect operation unit 300 according to the operation instruction effect, and indicates, for example, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the advantageous game state, the degree of expectation of occurrence of the advantageous game state, and the like.

In step S1012, the peripheral control MPU may set the operation determination flag to OFF before executing the operation determination if the current operation determination flag is ON. In this case, in step S1012, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string "111" is included, it sets the operation determination flag to ON, and if it determines that the bit string "111" is not included, it sets the operation determination flag to It does not change.

In the example of FIG. 127A, the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 continuously for three cycles or more in F1. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2. Further, since the operation instruction effect is being executed in F1, the peripheral control MPU prepares for execution of the operation corresponding effect in F2.

Subsequently, in F2, no pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 at all. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F3. In addition, in the example of FIG. 127A, since the preparation for execution of the operation-responsive effect is completed in F2, the peripheral control MPU executes the operation-responsive effect from F3.

The peripheral control MPU generates the detection history by the pressure detection sensor 381 for each period, so that the detection history is not missed regardless of the timing of the operation of the performance operation unit 300 by the player. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU uses the detection history of the pressure detection sensor 381 generated for each cycle to execute the operation determination. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the is turned off, thereby suppressing a decline in the interest of the player. In addition, the peripheral control MPU is controlled when the pressure detection sensor 381 continuously detects pressure in n cycles or more in one frame (n is 2 or more and less than the total number of cycles in one frame (32 in this embodiment)). Integer), and by turning ON the operation determination flag, it is possible to suppress erroneous operation determination due to erroneous detection of the pressure detection sensor 381 such as noise and chattering. can.

FIG. 127B is a timing chart showing another example of the pressing operation determination process. FIG. 127A shows an example in which the pressure detection sensor 381 detects a plurality of times of continuous pressure for three cycles or more in F1.

In the example of FIG. 127B, the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 continuously for three cycles or more in F1. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2. Description of the rendering state is omitted because it is the same as in FIG. 127A.

At this time, the peripheral control unit MPU does not necessarily have to search all of the bit strings in the search of the bit strings in the work area 1261 in the operation determination in step S1012 of F2. When the peripheral control MPU detects even one bit string "111", the operation determination flag is set to ON, and the operation determination process is terminated. This process can reduce the amount of processing related to operation determination.

In the example of FIG. 127B, when the peripheral control MPU searches the bit strings in the work area 1261 in chronological order in the operation determination in step S1012 of F2, first, the bit string " 111” is detected. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU sets the determination flag to ON when the bit string is detected, and terminates the operation determination process.

FIG. 127C is a timing chart showing another example of the pressing operation determination process. FIG. 127C is an example in which the pressure detection sensor 381 detects two consecutive cycles of pressure in F1 and further detects three consecutive cycles of pressure across F1 and F2.

In the example of FIG. 127C, in F1, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect a continuous pressure for three cycles or more. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F2. In addition, since the peripheral control unit MPU has set the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F2, the effect state in F2 remains the operation instruction effect from F1.

In the example of FIG. 127C, in F2, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects pressure only in the first and second cycles. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F3.

Note that, as in F1 and F2 in the example of FIG. 127C , continuous pressure detection of three cycles or more is not performed in each of the two frames, but when continuous pressure detection of three cycles or more is detected across the two frames, , the peripheral control MPU may set the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of the frame next to the two frames (F3 in the example of FIG. 127C). An example of operation determination processing for setting the operation determination flag to ON in such a case will be described below.

A specific example of the operation determination process when the bit string of the work area 1261 is 32 bits will be described. When the leftmost three bits of the bit string in the work area 1261 are "110" during operation determination, the peripheral control MPU stores a two-bit bit string "11" in the peripheral control RAM, and the leftmost two bits are "110". If it is "10", a bit string "1" consisting of 1 bit is stored in the peripheral control RAM. Then, the peripheral control MPU can search the 33-bit or 34-bit bit string added to the right side of the bit string in the work area 1261 for the stored bit string in the next operation determination.

A specific example of the operation determination process when the bit string of the work area 1261 is 33 bits will be described. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the second bit from the left of the bit string is "1" and the third bit from the left is "0" in operation determination, the peripheral control MPU sets the bit string "1" consisting of one bit. Store in peripheral control RAM. Then, the peripheral control MPU searches the 34 bit strings added to the right side of the bit strings in the work area 1261 for the stored bit strings in the next operation determination. Further, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the second bit from the left of the bit string in the work area 1261 is “0” at the time of operation determination, the peripheral control MPU determines that the 1st bit from the left to the 33rd bit from the left in the next operation determination. A bit string (that is, a bit string in the work area 1261) consisting of .

A specific example of the operation determination process when the bit string of the work area 1261 is 34 bits will be described. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the second bit from the left of the bit string is "1" and the third bit from the left is "0" in the operation determination, the peripheral control MPU determines that the next operation determination is to change the bit string from the left to "1". A bit string from the 34th bit to the 34th bit (that is, the bit string in the work area 1261) can be retrieved. Further, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the second bit from the left of the bit string is "0" at the time of operation determination, in the next operation determination, the bit string consisting of the 1st bit from the left to the 33rd bit from the left should be searched for.

A specific example of the operation determination process when the bit string of the work area 1261 is 35 bits or more will be described. When the value of the 34th bit from the left is "1" and the value of the 35th bit from the left is "0", the peripheral control MPU controls the bit string consisting of the 1st bit to the 34th bit from the left. operation judgment. Further, when the value of the 34th bit from the left is "0", the peripheral control MPU performs operation determination on a bit string consisting of the 1st bit to the 33rd bit from the left. By these processes, the peripheral control MPU can set the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F3 in the example of FIG. 127C.

[10-3. Pressing Operation Determination Processing Using Multiple Pressing Detection Sensors]
In the above example, an example in which one pressure detection sensor and one pressure detection piece are attached to the effect operation unit 300 has been described, but a plurality of pressure detection sensors and a plurality of pressure detection pieces are attached to the effect operation unit 300. may have been An example of pressing operation determination processing using a plurality of pressing detection sensors will be described below.

FIG. 128 is a plan view of the effect operation unit 300 to which a plurality of pressure detection sensors and a plurality of pressure detection pieces are attached, viewed from the forward/backward direction of the effect operation section button unit. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the lower part of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361, and includes pressing detection sensors 381a to 381c for detecting pressing operations of the pressing operation portion 303. FIG.

In addition, the center button body 373 includes pressing detection pieces 373h to 373j projecting downward from the bottom portion 373b of the center button body 373. As shown in FIG. The pressure detection pieces 373h to 373j are detected by pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c, respectively.

The arrangement of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c in a plan view of the upper surface of the central press operation portion 303a and the arrangement of the pressure detection pieces 373h to 373j in a plan view of the upper surface of the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 are shown in the example of FIG. may differ from The position where the player is likely to touch when pressing down the central pressing operation portion 303a varies depending on the installation position and inclination of the central pressing operation portion 303a in the pachinko machine 1, the design of the central pressing operation portion 303a, and the like.

For example, the further to the left of the center of the front view of the door frame 3 the installation position of the center pressing operation portion 303a is, the more the player presses down the center pressing operation portion 303a. More likely to touch the right side. Similarly, the further to the right of the center of the right and left sides of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front, the more the player presses down the center push operation part 303a, the more the upper surface of the center push operation part 303a is viewed from above. It is more likely to touch the left side than the center.

Further, for example, when the central pressing operation portion 303a is installed at an angle, that is, when the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a is not horizontal, when the player presses down the central pressing operation portion 303a, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a There is a high possibility of touching a position with a high vertical height. Further, for example, if a mark with characters such as "PUSH!" likely to be touched.

For example, it is desirable that at least one pressure detection sensor be arranged immediately below the position in the pressing direction that the player is likely to touch when pressing the central pressing operation portion 303a. In addition, from the viewpoint of improving pressure detection accuracy, for example, it is desirable that the pressure detection sensors are more dispersed in plan view as the area of the central pressure operation portion 303a increases.

In the example of FIG. 128, three pressure detection sensors and three pressure detection pieces are attached to the effect operation unit 300. However, even if two or four or more pressure detection sensors and pressure detection pieces are attached, good. From the viewpoint of improving pressure detection accuracy, for example, it is desirable that the larger the area of the central pressing operation portion 303a, the more pressure detection sensors are attached. Since the effect operation unit 300 is provided with a plurality of pressure detection sensors, it is possible to reduce omission of pressure detection when the player presses the central pressing operation section 303a, and furthermore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player. can.

[10-3-1. Pressing operation determination processing (OR determination) using a plurality of pressing detection sensors]
FIG. 129A is a timing chart showing an example of pressing operation determination processing using a plurality of pressing detection sensors. 129A and subsequent drawings, "sensor output A" is the output of the pressure detection sensor 381a, "sensor output B" is the output of the pressure detection sensor 381b, and "sensor output C" is the output of the pressure detection sensor 381c. indicate.

The peripheral control MPU secures a work area 1261 corresponding to each of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c in the peripheral control RAM, for example, in the first step S1106 in the first peripheral control unit steady process or before the first step S1106. do.

For example, in step S1012 in each frame, the peripheral control MPU executes operation determination to determine whether or not the first condition is satisfied. The first condition is a condition indicating that pressure has been detected continuously for three cycles or more by at least one of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c in the most recent frame. Note that "three cycles" in the first condition may be "n cycles" (where n is an integer equal to or greater than 2 and less than the total number of cycles in one frame (32 in this embodiment)).

In determining the first condition, the peripheral control MPU, for example, searches for bit strings in the corresponding work area 1261 for each of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c, and determines whether or not the bit string "111" is included.

When the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string "111" is included in the work area 1261 of at least one of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c, it determines that the first condition is satisfied, and sets the operation determination flag to ON. . When the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string "111" is not included in the work area 1261 of all the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c, it determines that the first condition is not satisfied, and sets the operation determination flag to OFF.

In the example of FIG. 129A, in F1, the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381a continuously for three cycles or more. Accordingly, since the first condition is satisfied in F1, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2. Further, since the operation instruction effect is being executed in F1, the peripheral control MPU prepares for execution of the operation corresponding effect in F2.

Note that an order of priority may be set in advance for the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c. At this time, the peripheral control MPU checks whether the first condition is satisfied in order from the pressure detection sensors with the highest priority. judge. Note that when the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string "111" is included in the work area 1261 corresponding to a certain pressure detection sensor, it sets the operation determination flag to ON at that time, and gives priority to the pressure detection sensor. It is not necessary to perform the operation determination for the low pressure detection sensor.

The operation determination process using priority can reduce the amount of processing related to operation determination. In addition, as described above, the position where the player is likely to touch when pressing down the central pressing operation portion 303a is the installation position and inclination of the central pressing operation portion 303a in the pachinko machine 1, and the position of the central pressing operation portion 303a. Varies depending on design, etc. To further increase the effect of reducing the amount of processing related to operation determination by setting a higher priority in a press detection sensor located near a position that is likely to be touched by a player when pressing the central press operation portion 303a. can be done.

FIG. 129B is a timing chart showing an example of pressing operation determination processing using a plurality of pressing detection sensors. In the example of FIG. 129B, the pressure detection sensor 381a detects pressure in the fourth to fifth cycles of F1, and the pressure detection sensor 381b detects pressure in the fifth to sixth cycles of F1. The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the operation determination of step S1012 in each frame, and turns on the operation determination flag when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. set, and if both are not satisfied, the operation determination flag may be set to OFF.

The second condition is that the pressure is detected by the first pressure detection sensor, which is one of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c, in the a-2th cycle and the a-1th cycle of the most recent frame (a is 2 or more and 1 The total period of the frame (integer that is equal to or less than 32 in this embodiment), and the second pressure detection sensor that is one of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c and is different from the first pressure detection sensor a-1 of the nearest frame This is a condition indicating that the pressure is detected in the th cycle and the a th cycle. That is, the second condition is satisfied at F1 in the example of FIG. 129B.

The peripheral control MPU, for example, determines whether the second condition is satisfied as follows. The peripheral control MPU searches the bit string in the corresponding work area 1261 for each of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c to determine whether or not the bit string "110" is included. If the bit string "110" is not included in any work area 1261, the peripheral control MPU determines that the second condition is not satisfied.

The peripheral control MPU detects the bit string "110" from the work area 1261 corresponding to a certain pressure detection sensor, and in at least one work area 1261 of another pressure detection sensor, the value of the bit at the same position as the detected bit string. is "011", it is determined that the second condition is satisfied. If the peripheral control MPU does not detect the bit string "110", or if it determines that the corresponding bit string "011" does not exist for all detected bit strings "110", it determines that the second condition is not satisfied. .

As described above, in the example of FIG. 129B, the second condition is satisfied in F1, so the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2. Further, since the operation instruction effect is being executed in F1, the peripheral control MPU prepares for execution of the operation corresponding effect in F2.

Note that when the “three cycles” in the first condition is “n cycles”, the second condition is that in the most recent frame, the first pressure detection sensor continuously detects x cycles and the second pressure detection sensor detects continuous y cycles. (x, y are integers greater than or equal to 2 and less than n), part of the x period and the y period overlap, and from the earlier of the start of the x period and the start of the y period, the x period or the end of the y period, whichever is later, is the n period.

Further, the second condition at this time is that, in the most recent frame, the pressure is continuously detected by the first pressure detection sensor in x cycles and by the second pressure detection sensor in y cycles (where x and y are greater than or equal to 1 and less than n). is an integer, at least one of x and y is 2 or more, and x + y = n), and from the earlier of the start of the x period and the start of the y period to the end of the x period and the end of the y period It may be indicated that the time to the later time is n cycles.

It should be noted that even when the histories of a plurality of pressure detection sensors are used, the peripheral control unit MPU does not necessarily have to search for all bit strings in searching for bit strings in each of the work areas 1261 in operation determination in step S1012 of F2. no. When the peripheral control MPU determines to set the operation determination flag to ON, it suffices to stop the search and end the operation determination.

FIG. 129C is a timing chart showing another example of pressing operation determination processing using a plurality of pressing detection sensors. In the example of FIG. 129C, the pressure detection sensor 381a and the pressure detection sensor 381b detect pressure in the same two consecutive cycles of F1. However, since this does not satisfy both the first condition and the second condition, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F2. The production state in F2 remains the operation instruction production from F1.

Further, in F2, the pressure detection sensor 381a detects one cycle of pressure, the pressure detection sensor 381b detects one cycle of pressure following the one cycle, and the pressure detection sensor 381c is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381b. One cycle of pressure following one cycle of pressure is detected. However, since this does not satisfy both the first condition and the second condition, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F3. The production state in F3 remains the operation instruction production from F2.

In F3, the pressure detection sensor 381a detects two cycles of pressure, and the pressure detection sensor 381b detects one cycle of pressure following the two cycles. However, since neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F4 (frame following F3). The production state in F4 remains the operation instruction production from F3.

Note that the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the third condition is satisfied in the operation determination of step S1012 in each frame, and sets the operation determination flag to ON when the third condition is satisfied. is not satisfied, the operation determination flag may be set to OFF. The third condition is a condition indicating that pressure has been detected by at least one of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c continuously for three cycles or more in the most recent frame.

The third condition is satisfied at F2 and F3 in the example of FIG. 129C. Note that "3 cycles" in the third condition may be "n cycles" (n is an integer equal to or greater than 2 and less than the total number of cycles of one frame (32 in this embodiment)).

The peripheral control MPU, for example, determines whether or not the third condition is satisfied as follows. The peripheral control MPU performs an OR operation on the bits at the same position in the bit string of the work area 1261 of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c, and generates a bit string in which the operation results are arranged at corresponding positions. The peripheral control MPU determines that the third condition is satisfied when the bit string obtained from the calculation result includes the bit string "111", and determines that the bit string obtained from the calculation result does not include the bit string "111". Determine that the conditions are not satisfied.

By executing the above-described pressing operation determination process using a plurality of pressing detection sensors, the peripheral control MPU can suppress failure to detect pressing, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest of the player. The press detection sensor 381 detects chattering, noise, etc. in the order of operation determination using only the first condition, operation determination using the first condition and the second condition, and operation determination using the third condition, as described above. It is highly effective in suppressing erroneous operation determination due to erroneous detection. Further, the player operates the effect operation unit 300 in the above-described order of operation determination using the third condition, operation determination using the first and second conditions, and operation determination using only the first condition. This is highly effective in suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which the operation determination flag is turned off even though the operation determination flag is turned off.

[10-3-2. Pressing Operation Determination Processing (AND Determination) Using Multiple Press Detection Sensors]
FIG. 130A is a timing chart showing another example of pressing operation determination processing using a plurality of pressing detection sensors. In the example of FIG. 130A, the pressure detection sensor 381a and the pressure detection sensor 381b detect pressure in the same two consecutive cycles of F1. In the example of FIG. 130A, operation determination is performed according to a fourth condition, which will be described later.

Note that the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the fourth condition is satisfied in the operation determination of step S1012 in each frame, and sets the operation determination flag to ON when the fourth condition is satisfied. is not satisfied, the operation determination flag may be set to OFF. The fourth condition is that in the most recent frame, more than half of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c (that is, two or more in the present embodiment) have detected pressure in the same continuous three cycles or more. It is a condition that indicates In the example of FIG. 130A, the fourth condition is satisfied at F1.

Note that "3 cycles" in the fourth condition may be "n cycles" (n is an integer equal to or greater than 2 and less than the total number of cycles of one frame (32 in this embodiment)). In addition, "half or more" in the fourth condition may be replaced with "predetermined ratio or more" or "predetermined number equal to or less than the number of pressure detection sensors installed in the effect operation unit 300 and equal to or greater than 2".

The peripheral control MPU, for example, determines whether the fourth condition is satisfied as follows. The peripheral control MPU searches the bit string in the corresponding work area 1261 for each of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c to determine whether or not the bit string "111" is included. The peripheral control MPU determines that the work area 1261 corresponding to a certain pressure detection sensor includes the bit string "111", and in at least one work area 1261 of another pressure detection sensor, the bit string at the same position as the bit string. When it is determined that the value is "111", it is determined that the fourth condition is satisfied.

In the example of FIG. 130A, since the fourth condition is satisfied in F1, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2. Further, since the operation instruction effect is being executed in F1, the peripheral control MPU prepares for execution of the operation corresponding effect in F2.

By executing the operation determination using the fourth condition, the peripheral control MPU reduces noise, chattering, etc. of the press detection sensor 381 as compared with the operation determination based on the first condition, the second condition, or the third condition. It is possible to further suppress errors in operation determination due to erroneous detection of . Further, when the fourth condition is used, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON only when a plurality of pressure detection sensors simultaneously detect pressure. Even in a case where the pressure detection sensor is always shielded from light due to being caught, it is possible to suppress erroneous operation determination due to erroneous detection. Operation determination using the above-described first condition, second condition, or third condition is compared with operation determination using the fourth condition, even though the player has operated the effect operation unit 300. , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation determination flag is turned OFF.

FIG. 130B is a timing chart showing another example of pressing operation determination processing using a plurality of pressing detection sensors. In the example of FIG. 130B, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the fourth condition is satisfied in the operation determination of step S1012 in each frame, and sets the operation determination flag to ON when the fourth condition is satisfied. , the operation determination flag is set to OFF when the fourth condition is not satisfied.

In the example of FIG. 130B, the pressure detection sensor 381a and the pressure detection sensor 381b detect pressure in the same two consecutive cycles of F1. However, since this does not satisfy the fourth condition, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F2. The production state in F2 remains the operation instruction production from F1.

Further, in F2, the pressure detection sensor 381a and the pressure detection sensor 381b detect pressure in the same two consecutive cycles, and the pressure detection sensor 381b and the pressure detection sensor 381c detect one cycle immediately after the same two cycles. , the pressure is detected. However, since this also does not satisfy the fourth condition, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F3. The production state in F3 remains the operation instruction production from F2.

Further, in F3, the pressure detection sensor 381a and the pressure detection sensor 381b detect pressure in the same cycle, the pressure detection sensor 381a and the pressure detection sensor 381c detect pressure in the cycle immediately after the same, The press detection sensor 381b and the press detection sensor 381c detect the press in one cycle immediately after the one cycle immediately after that. However, since this also does not satisfy the fourth condition, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F4. The production state in F4 remains the operation instruction production from F3.

Note that the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the fifth condition is satisfied in the operation determination of step S1012 in each frame, and sets the operation determination flag to ON when the fifth condition is satisfied. is not satisfied, the operation determination flag may be set to OFF. The fifth condition is a condition indicating that pressure has been detected by more than half of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c in the most recent frame, and that the pressure has been detected continuously for three cycles or more.

In the example of FIG. 130B, the fifth condition is satisfied at F2 and F3. Note that "3 cycles" in the fifth condition may be "n cycles" (n is an integer equal to or greater than 2 and less than the total number of cycles of one frame (32 in this embodiment)). In addition, "half or more" in the fifth condition may be replaced with "predetermined ratio or more" or "predetermined number equal to or less than the number of pressure detection sensors installed in the effect operation unit 300 and equal to or greater than 2".

The peripheral control MPU, for example, determines whether the fifth condition is satisfied as follows. A sum is calculated for each bit at the same position in the bit string of the work area 1261 of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c. If the calculated sum is 2 or more, 1 is set. A bit string arranged at positions corresponding to the same positions is generated.

The peripheral control MPU determines whether the bit string "111" is included in the generated bit string. If the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string "111" is included in the generated bit string, it determines that the fifth condition is satisfied, and the peripheral control MPU determines that the generated bit string does not include the bit string "111". If so, it is determined that the fifth condition is not satisfied.

Judgment using the fifth condition can suppress erroneous operation judgment due to erroneous detection of the pressure detection sensor 381 such as noise and chattering, compared to judgment using the fourth condition. Further, in the determination using the fourth condition, as compared with the determination using the fifth condition, even though the player has operated the effect operation unit 300, the operation determination flag becomes OFF. can be suppressed.

[11. Special effect triggered by the lowering determination of the outer peripheral pressing operation part]
An example of a special effect triggered by the lowering determination of the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132. FIG. Note that the special effects described below are not limited to determining the downward movement of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. It can be used as an opportunity.

FIG. 131 is an explanatory diagram showing a "lock the buttons effect" including an example of the special effect of this embodiment. "Lock the button effect" is an example of the ready-to-win effect during the normal game state. When the "lock the button effect" starts, the display control MPU causes the effect display device 1600 to display the ready-to-win pattern in accordance with the instruction from the peripheral control MPU.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU drives the operation button elevation drive motor 367 so that the elevation cam member 371 rotates, for example, counterclockwise or clockwise in a plan view by a predetermined amount. The pressing operation portion 303b is moved to the raised position. The peripheral control MPU may drive the operation button elevation drive motor 367 until the elevation detection sensor 376a detects the elevation detection piece 373g.

Furthermore, the display control MPU displays characters such as "Lock the buttons!" Hereinafter, such a state in which an effect prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 300 is being executed is referred to as a special effect operation instruction state. When the player presses the peripheral pressing operation part 303b or the central pressing operation part 303a according to the instruction "Lock the buttons!", the peripheral pressing operation part 303b is moved to the lowered position. At this time, the guide pin 364d moves downward along the second cam 371d.

When the peripheral control MPU determines that a jackpot has been announced in the "lock the button effect" and determines that the outer circumference pressing operation part 303b is in the lowered position, the elevation cam member 371 is, for example, The guide pin 364d is locked to the locking portion 371c by driving the operation button lifting drive motor 367 so as to rotate clockwise by a predetermined amount. That is, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is locked at the lowered position. The action of locking the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b at the lowered position in the "lock the button effect" is an example of a special effect.

The details of how the peripheral control MPU determines that the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b is at the lowered position will be described later. Further, the peripheral control MPU, for example, for the display control MPU, for example, a display effect of displaying, on the effect display device 1600, for example, a symbol for a big win and characters announcing the winning of a big win such as "Big win! Congratulation!" command to execute

Although the details will be described later, the special effects are performed when the peripheral control MPU determines that the jackpot is announced in the "lock the buttons effect" and determines that the outer circumference pressing operation part 303b is in the lowered position. This is performed in step S1108 in the cycle of control timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU instructs the display control MPU to execute the display effect, for example, in step S1016 of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing from the next time onward. In place of or in addition to the display effect, predetermined sound output from various speakers, predetermined pattern light emission from various LEDs, and operation (vibration, etc.) of operation units such as the outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b are executed. may

The peripheral control MPU does not drive the operation button up/down drive motor 367 even if the outer circumference pressing operation part 303b is at the lowered position when the big hit is not won in the "lock the buttons effect". That is, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is raised to the raised position again. Furthermore, for example, after the peripheral control MPU determines that the jackpot non-winning is notified in the "lock the button effect" and determines that the outer circumference pressing operation part 303b is in the lowered position, the rise detection sensor 376a rises. When it is determined that the detection piece 373g has been detected, the display control MPU follows the instruction of the peripheral control MPU to display, for example, a design for losing and characters such as "Unfortunately..." to announce that the jackpot has not been won. Display on device 1600 .

Further, the peripheral control MPU drives the operation button elevation drive motor 367 so as to rotate the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise by a predetermined amount in plan view after a predetermined period of time (for example, 200 ms) has passed after the jackpot non-winning notification. By doing so, the guide pin 364d is locked to the locking portion 371c. That is, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 moves the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b to the lowered position and fixes it. Note that the peripheral control MPU may drive the operation button elevation drive motor 367 until the descent detection sensor 382 detects the descent detection piece 370c.

It should be noted that when the player ignores the instruction "Lock the buttons!" When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed but the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b does not move to the lowered position, the peripheral control MPU does not determine that the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is at the lowered position. At this time, after a predetermined time has passed, the peripheral control MPU moves the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b to the lowered position and fixes it. The method for moving and fixing the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b to the lowered position is as described above.

Not limited to the special effect, the peripheral control MPU determines that the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b is in the raised position (that is, the rise detection piece 373g is detected by the rise detection sensor 376a), and a predetermined time has passed. In this case, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b may be moved to the lowered position and fixed.

In the above description, the operation of locking the outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b in the lowered position when winning the jackpot has been described as an example of a special effect. output of a predetermined sound from the LED, light emission of a predetermined pattern from various LEDs, and operation (vibration, etc.) of an operation unit such as the outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b.

In addition, in the special effect operation instruction state at the time of winning the jackpot, the example in which the special effect is started by determining that the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b is in the lowered position has been described. This includes operating other operation units such as the operation unit 303a and the touch panel during the special effect operation instruction state.

In addition, the special effect is not only the effect of notifying the winning or not winning of the jackpot, Including effects etc. that suggest the presence or absence of probability variation in the relevant jackpot.

Further, in the "lock the buttons effect", the display effect is executed after the special effect is executed, but there may be an effect in which only the special effect is executed.

FIG. 132 is a timing chart showing an example of the lowering position determination processing of the peripheral pressing operation portion 303b by the peripheral control MPU. In the example of FIG. 132, at F1, the descent detection sensor 382 continuously detects the descent of the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b for three cycles or more.

The peripheral control MPU secures a work area in the peripheral control RAM for storing the detection history of the descent detection sensor 382, for example, in the initial step S1106 in the initial peripheral control unit steady-state processing, or before the initial step S1106. do. Hereinafter, this work area will be referred to as a special effect work area.

The special effect work area is a work area that stores a bit string consisting of 3 or more bits, for example, and stores a detection flag by the descent detection sensor 382 . Note that the initial value of the bit string in the work area for special effect is, for example, a state in which all bits are "0". Further, when the peripheral control MPU secures a work area 1261 of 32 bits or more for storing the detection history by the descent detection sensor 382 in FIG. Instead, the work area 1261 is also used as a work area for special effects.

In step S1106 in each cycle, the peripheral control MPU updates the work area for special effect by performing the same processing as updating the work area 1261 on the detection information by the descent detection sensor 382. FIG. Therefore, when the bit string of the work area for special effect is k bits, the work area for special effect holds the detection history by the descent detection sensor 382 in the latest k cycles.

Further, in step S1106 in each cycle, the peripheral control MPU executes elevation cam member operation determination to determine whether or not the descent detection sensor 382 continuously detects descent in the most recent three cycles, for example. Specifically, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the bit string corresponding to the last three cycles is "111" by referring to the work area for special effect in determining the operation of the elevation cam member.

When the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string corresponding to the three most recent cycles is "111", it determines that the outer circumference pressing operation part 303b is at the lowered position. Further, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the current effect state is the special effect operation instruction state, in step S1108, the peripheral control MPU executes the special effect of locking the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b in the lowered position. However, for example, the guide pin 364d is locked to the locking portion 371c by driving the operation button elevation drive motor 367 so as to rotate clockwise by a predetermined amount in plan view.

That is, in step S1106 of a certain cycle, the peripheral control MPU determines that the current effect state is the special effect operation instruction state and that the descent has been detected continuously by the descent detection sensor 382 in the last three cycles, the next Without waiting for the start of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing (frame start), the elevation cam member 371 is operated in step S1108 of the certain cycle, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is locked at the lowered position. It is desirable that the peripheral control MPU operates the elevation cam member 371 in step S1108 of the certain cycle. In step S1108, the elevation cam member 371 may be operated.

As a result, the time from when the player moves the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b to the lowered position to when the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b is locked is shortened, so that the player moves the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b to the lowered position. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unnatural motion in which the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b is slightly raised after the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is moved, and thus it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player. In addition, after the player moves the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b to the lowered position, the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b rises before the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b is locked, and the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b is not locked. suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

It should be noted that the "3 cycles" in the elevation cam member operation determination may be "m cycles" (m is an arbitrary integer). The smaller m is, the more errors in lowering position determination due to erroneous detection of the lowering detection sensor 382 such as noise and chattering. The occurrence can be suppressed. Similarly, the larger m is, the lower the number of errors in lowering position determination due to erroneous detection of the lowering detection sensor 382 such as noise and chattering. There will be more situations where you don't.

As described above, it is highly unlikely that erroneous detection due to noise or chattering will occur continuously for three cycles (approximately 3.12 ms) or more, so m is preferably 3 or more. Furthermore, m is set to 3 in this embodiment in order to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the special effect does not occur even though the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b has moved to the lowered position. Further, when "3 cycles" in the elevation cam member operation determination is "m cycles", the bit string in the work area for special effect is m bits or more.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU executes display effect start determination before acquisition of the detection history of the first cycle of each frame (for example, step S1012 of each frame). In the display effect start determination, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the descent has been detected by the descent detection sensor 382 continuously for three cycles or more in the most recent frame, for example, in the same manner as the above-described pressing operation determination.

When the peripheral control MPU determines that the descent has been detected by the descent detection sensor 382 continuously for three cycles or more in the most recent frame, and determines that the state of the most recent frame includes the special effect operation instruction state, In steps S1028 to S1032 and the like of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing, preparations are made to execute the display effects.

In the display effect start determination, the peripheral control MPU may determine whether or not a special effect has been executed in the most recent frame. In steps S1028 to S1032 and the like of the control unit regular processing, preparations are made to execute the display effects.

The peripheral control MPU executes the display effect in steps S1014 to S1018 of the peripheral control unit steady process in the frame after completion of the preparation for execution of the display effect. In the example of FIG. 132, the display effect execution preparation is completed in one frame, but the display effect execution preparation and the display effect may be executed over a plurality of frames.

[12. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU uses the detection history of the pressure detection sensor 381 acquired for each cycle (the cycle in which timer interrupt processing is performed) to determine whether or not the central pressing operation unit 303a has been operated. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation determination flag is turned OFF even though the press detection sensor 381 has detected a press, and thus it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player. . Further, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag when the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 continuously for n cycles or more in the most recent frame (n is an integer equal to or more than 2 and less than the total number of cycles of one frame). By turning ON, it is possible to suppress erroneous operation determination due to erroneous detection of the pressure detection sensor 381 such as noise and chattering, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest of the player.

In addition, since the length of the bit string in the work area 1261 that stores the detection history by the pressure detection sensor 381 acquired for each cycle is the same as the total number of cycles of one frame, the work area 1261 can store , the entire detection history of the pressure detection sensor 381 in the most recent frame can be stored, and the memory capacity used for the work area 1261 can be saved.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 may include a plurality of pressure detection sensors. In this case, it is possible to reduce omission of pressure detection when the player presses the central pressure operation section 303a, and furthermore, it is possible to increase the interest of the player. Decrease can be suppressed. Further, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON when any of the plurality of pressure detection sensors continuously detects a pressure for n cycles or more, so that the player can use the central pressure operation unit 303a. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the operation determination flag is turned OFF in spite of the fact that is pressed, and furthermore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

In addition, an order of priority may be set in advance for the plurality of pressure detection sensors 381, and the peripheral control MPU executes the pressure operation determination in order from the pressure detection sensor with the highest priority, and turns on the pressure operation determination flag. Pressing operation determination in the frame may be stopped at the time when it is determined to set to . This makes it possible to reduce the amount of processing involved in the pressing operation determination. In addition, by setting a higher priority in the pressing detection sensor located near the position where the player is likely to touch the central pressing operation portion 303a when pressing, the effect of reducing the amount of processing related to the pressing operation determination can be further improved. can be increased.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU sets a pressing operation determination flag when a pressing operation is detected in the same continuous cycle of n cycles or more by a plurality of pressing sensors of a predetermined ratio or more of the plurality of pressing sensors in the most recent frame. may be set to ON (n is an integer equal to or greater than 2 and less than the total number of cycles in one frame). As a result, the peripheral control MPU can further suppress erroneous operation determination due to erroneous detection of pressing due to noise, chattering, etc., thereby suppressing a decline in interest of the player. In addition, as a result, the peripheral control MPU suppresses erroneous operation determination due to erroneous detection even when, for example, a foreign object is caught in one pressure detection sensor and the pressure detection sensor is always blocked from light. In addition, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

Further, in each cycle, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the descent has been continuously detected by the descent detection sensor 382 in the last n cycles, and the current effect state is the special effect operation instruction state, and the last n If it is determined that the descent detection sensor 382 continuously detects descent in a period, the elevation cam member 371 is operated in step S1108 of the certain period without waiting for the start of the next frame, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is lowered. Lock in position. As a result, the time from when the player moves the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b to the lowered position to when the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b is locked is shortened, so that the player moves the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b to the lowered position. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unnatural motion in which the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b is slightly raised after the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is moved, and thus it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the movable effect unit, the rotating decorative body 3126 which is rotatable around an axis extending in the left and right direction and in which a plurality (four) of decorative portions 3127 which are different from each other in the circumferential direction are formed is arranged in the left and right direction. Although four are provided on the same axis as shown in the figure, the present invention is not limited to this, but a rotary decoration body which is rotatable around an axis extending vertically and has a plurality of decoration parts different from each other in the circumferential direction is formed. It may be provided with at least one, at least one rotatable decorative body that can rotate around an axis extending back and forth, or at least one movable decorative body that slides in the left-right direction. .

In the above embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 is used for the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 that move up and down via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, but it is limited to this. Instead, a clutch mechanism 3250 may be provided between a movable decoration that moves in the left-right direction, a movable decoration that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, or the like, and the drive motor.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 includes the storage case 3251, the input member 3252, the output member 3253, and the rollers 3254, but the clutch mechanism 3250 is not limited to this. and a speed converter for transmitting the reduced rotation to the output side. a first planetary gear mechanism having a non-rotatable fixed ring gear and a second planetary gear mechanism having a second sun gear coupled to the first sun gear, a second planetary gear and a rotatable rotating ring gear; , between the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism, a carrier having support shafts for supporting each is arranged on both sides, and in the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism, a ring At least one of the gear and the sun gear may be provided with a difference in the number of teeth so that the rotation from the driving motor is reduced and transmitted to the rotating ring gear.

1 pachinko machine 3 door frame 4 main body frame 5 game board 5a game area 381 pressure detection sensor 381a pressure detection sensor 381b pressure detection sensor 381c pressure detection sensor 382 descent detection sensor 1261 work area 1310 main control board 1510 peripheral control board 1511 peripheral control unit 1512 Effect display control unit 1600 Effect display device 3000 Back unit 3300 Upper front movable effect unit 3301 Unit base 3302 Upper front drive motor (driving motor)
3303 First link rod 3304 Second link rod (link member)
3305 Upper stopper 3306 Lower stopper 3350 Upper front movable decoration 3351 Central decoration (main decoration)
3352 first projecting decoration (sub-decoration unit)
3352a First projecting decoration (sub-decoration)
3352b first connecting rod (connecting member)
3352c Link attachment portion 3353 Second projecting decoration (sub-decoration unit)
3353a Second projecting decoration (sub-decoration)
3353b Second connecting rod (connecting member)
3353c link mount

Claims (1)

A receiving slot capable of accepting game balls, and a lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the acceptance of the game balls into the receiving slot, and based on the fact that the result of the lottery is a specific result, the player receives a game ball. A gaming machine in which an advantageous winning game is executed,
a first display means capable of displaying an effect corresponding to the result of the lottery in a display area;
a second display means arranged at a predetermined distance in front of the first display means;
a movable body movable from a standby position to an operating position so as to cover the display area of the first display means;
with
The second display means has a transparent light guide plate and a plurality of light emitting portions arranged on one end face side of a plurality of end faces of the light guide plate, and the light from the light emitting portions is projected onto the light guide plate. A predetermined pattern appears on the front side of the light guide plate by being incident from one end face side,
The pattern appearing on the front side of the light guide plate has a plurality of aspects including a first pattern and a second pattern different in aspect from the first pattern, and the pattern appearing in the plurality of aspects is the above-described It is made possible to appear by a plurality of light emitting parts arranged on one end face side,
A first display area of the light guide plate in which the first pattern appears and a second display area of the light guide plate in which the second pattern appears are light emitted from the light emitting unit arranged on the one end face side. are superimposed in the direction of incidence of
The light-emitting portion, which emits light when causing the first pattern to appear on the second display means, receives light from an end face of the second display means, and the first pattern appears on the second display means. a region smaller than an end face side pattern region projected on the end face of the second display means provided with the light emitting portion capable of appearing the first pattern, and
By causing the plurality of light emitting units to emit light in a specific order, the second display means can perform an effect in which the pattern moves,
The movable body, which is movable so as to cover the display area of the first display means, is movable behind the light guide plate, and the pattern appearing on the front side of the light guide plate is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by not being covered.

Images